2007 pontiac torrent owner manual m - general motors · 2007 pontiac torrent owner manual m 1. ......

Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7Front Seats .............................................. 8Rear Seats ............................................. 17Safety Belts ............................................ 19Child Restraints ...................................... 43Airbag System ........................................ 72Restraint System Check ......................... 90

Features and Controls ................................ 93Keys ....................................................... 95Doors and Locks .................................. 104Windows ............................................... 109Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 111Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 114Mirrors .................................................. 129

OnStar® System ................................... 133Storage Areas ...................................... 137Sunroof ................................................ 143

Instrument Panel ....................................... 145Instrument Panel Overview ................... 148Climate Controls ................................... 166Warning Lights, Gages,

and Indicators ................................... 172Driver Information Center (DIC) ............ 194Audio System(s) ................................... 218

Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 289Your Driving, the Road, and

Your Vehicle ..................................... 290Towing ................................................. 326

2007 Pontiac Torrent Owner Manual M

1

Service and Appearance Care .................. 337Service ................................................. 339Fuel ...................................................... 341Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 346All-Wheel Drive ..................................... 378Bulb Replacement ................................ 380Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement .... 384Tires ..................................................... 386Appearance Care .................................. 420Vehicle Identification ............................. 430Electrical System .................................. 431Capacities and Specifications ................ 436

Maintenance Schedule .............................. 437Maintenance Schedule .......................... 438

Customer Assistance Information ............. 455Customer Assistance and

Information ........................................ 456Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 473

Index .......................................................... 477

2

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,PONTIAC, the PONTIAC Emblem, and the nameTORRENT are registered trademarks of GeneralMotors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at thetime it was printed. We reserve the right tomake changes after that time without furthernotice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitutethe name “General Motors of Canada Limited”for Pontiac Division whenever it appears inthis manual.

This manual describes features that may beavailable in this model, but your vehicle may nothave all of them. For example, more than oneentertainment system may be offered or yourvehicle may have been ordered without a frontpassenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be thereif it is needed while you are on the road. If thevehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your dealer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15860878 A First Printing ©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

3

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive their newvehicle. If this is done, it can help you learnabout the features and controls for the vehicle.Pictures and words work together in theowner manual to explain things.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. We use a box and the word CAUTION totell about things that could hurt you if you were toignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid orreduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. Ifyou do not, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find acircle with a slashthrough it in this book.This safety symbolmeans “Do Not,” “DoNot do this” or “Do Notlet this happen.”

4

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is somethingthat could damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. But the notice will tell what to do to helpavoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle. Theyuse the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operation or informationrelating to a specific component, control, message,gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage, or indicator, reference thefollowing topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

6

Front Seats ..................................................... 8Manual Seats ................................................ 8Driver Seat Height Adjuster ........................... 9Power Seat ................................................. 10Manual Lumbar ........................................... 10Heated Seats .............................................. 11Manual Reclining Seatbacks ........................ 11Head Restraints .......................................... 14Passenger Folding Seatback ....................... 15

Rear Seats .................................................... 17Split Folding Rear Seat ............................... 17

Safety Belts .................................................. 19Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 19Questions and Answers About Safety

Belts ........................................................ 24How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 25Driver Position ............................................. 25Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 34Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 35Right Front Passenger Position ................... 35Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 36Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 39Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 42Safety Belt Extender ................................... 42

Child Restraints ............................................ 43

Older Children ............................................. 43Infants and Young Children ......................... 46Child Restraint Systems .............................. 49Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 54Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children

(LATCH) .................................................. 57Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat

Position ................................................... 64Securing a Child Restraint in the Right

Front Seat Position .................................. 66Airbag System .............................................. 72

Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 75When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 78What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 80How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 80What Will You See After an Airbag

Inflates? ................................................... 81Passenger Sensing System ......................... 82Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 88Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 89Restraint System Check ............................... 90

Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 90Replacing Restraint System Parts After

a Crash ................................................... 91

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

7

Front Seats

Manual Seats

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

Lift the bar located under the front of the seat tounlock it. Slide the seat to where you want itand release the bar. Try to move the seat with yourbody to be sure the seat is locked in place.

8

Driver Seat Height Adjuster

If your vehicle has a manual driver seat heightadjuster, it is located on the outboard side of theseat near the front of the seat cushion.

To raise the seat, move the lever upwardrepeatedly until the seat is at the desired height.To lower the seat, move the lever downwardrepeatedly until the seat is at the desired height.

9

Power Seat

If the vehicle has a power seat, the control usedto operate it is located on the outboard side of thedriver’s seat. To adjust the seat do any of thefollowing:

• Move the seat forward or rearward by slidingthe control forward or rearward.

• Raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion by moving the front of the control upor down.

• Raise or lower the rear part of the seatcushion by moving the rear of the control upor down.

Manual Lumbar

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the knob islocated on the front ofthe driver seat lowercushion on theinboard side.

Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the lumbar support.

10

Heated Seats

If your vehicle hasheated seats, theswitches are located onthe center console of theinstrument panel abovethe shift lever.

The ignition must be on for the heated seats tooperate.

Press the switch, nearest to the seat, once to turnthe heated seat on to the high setting. Bothindicator lights will be lit. Press the switch asecond time to turn the heated seat to the lowsetting. One indicator light will be lit. Pressthe switch a third time to turn the heated seat off.

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

11

To adjust the seatback on the driver’s seat, lift thelever on the rear outboard side of the seat andmove the seatback to the desired position. Thenrelease the lever to lock the seatback in place.

To adjust the seatback on the front passenger’sseat, lift the lever on the outboard side of the seatand move the seatback to the desired position.Then release the lever to lock the seatbackin place. If your front passenger’s seat is a flatfolding seat, you must fully raise the lever todisengage the seatback.

Driver’s Seat with Manual Recline and ManualHeight Adjuster shown

Passenger Seat with Folding Seatback Optionshown

12

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.The shoulder belt cannot do its jobbecause it will not be against your body.Instead, it will be in front of you. In acrash, you could go into it, receiving neckor other injuries.The lap belt cannot do its job either. In acrash, the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.For proper protection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright.Then sit well back in the seat and wearyour safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle ismoving.

13

Head Restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of therestraint is at the same height as the top ofthe occupant’s head. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull the head restraintup to raise it. To lowerthe head restraint,press the button,located on the top of theseatback, and pushthe restraint down.

14

Passenger Folding SeatbackThe front passenger’s seatback may fold flat.

{CAUTION:

If you fold the seatback forward to carrylonger objects, such as skis, be sure anysuch cargo is not near an airbag. In acrash, an inflating airbag might force thatobject toward a person. This could causesevere injury or even death. Secure objectsaway from the area in which an airbagwould inflate. For more information, seeWhere Are the Airbags? on page 75 andLoading Your Vehicle on page 321.

{CAUTION:

Things you put on this seatback canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash. Remove or secureall items before driving.

To fold the seatback, do the following:

1. Lower the head restraint all the way.

2. Lift the bar under the front of the seat tounlock it. Slide the seat as far back as itwill go and release the bar. Try to move theseat back and forth to make sure it islocked into place.

15

3. Lift the recliner lever, located on the outboardside of the seat, up fully and fold the seatbackforward until it disengages.

4. Continue to fold the seat forward until it locksin the folded position.

5. Pull up on the seatback to be sure it islocked.

16

To raise the seatback, do the following:

1. Lift the recliner lever, located on the outboardside of the seat, up fully and push up on theseatback.

2. Continue raising the seatback until theseatback re-engages.

{CAUTION:


3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked in place.

The recliner lever is also used to recline theseatback while a passenger is seated. See ManualReclining Seatbacks on page 11.

Rear Seats

Split Folding Rear SeatThe rear split bench seatbacks have three availablepositions — folded forward, upright, or partiallyreclined. Both of the seatbacks can be moved toany of the three positions independent of the otherseatback position. The rear bench seat can also bemoved forward and rearward.

{CAUTION:


17

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed, notproperly attached, or twisted will notprovide the protection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising the rearseatback, always check to be sure that thesafety belts are properly routed andattached, and are not twisted.

To fold the seatback down, do the following:

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage tothe seat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

1. Ensure all three of the safety belts areunbuckled and the front seatbacks arenot reclined.

2. Lift the lever located on the top of theseatback to release the seatback.

3. Fold the seatback forward to the desiredposition.

18

To recline the seatback, do the following:

1. Lift and hold the lever located on top of theseatback.

2. Tilt the seatback rearward, then release thelever when the seatback is in the desiredposition.

To slide the entire seat forward or rearward, dothe following:

1. Lift and hold the release bar located under thefront of the seat cushion to unlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desired position.

3. Release the bar.

4. Try to move the seat back and forth to ensurethe seat is locked in place.

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to usesafety belts properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or shecannot wear a safety belt properly. If youare in a crash and you are not wearing asafety belt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can beseriously injured or killed. In the samecrash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safetybelt, and check that your passengers’belts are fastened properly too.

19

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has a lightthat comes on as areminder to buckle up.See Safety BeltReminder Light onpage 175.

In most states and in all Canadian provinces,the law says to wear safety belts.Here is why: They work.

You never know if you will be in a crash. If youdo have a crash, you do not know if it will bea bad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can beso serious that even buckled up, a personwould not survive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, people who buckle upcan survive and sometimes walk away. Withoutbelts they could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!

20

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just aseat on wheels.

Put someone on it.

21

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. Therider does not stop.

The person keeps going until stopped bysomething. In a real vehicle, it could be thewindshield...

22

or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop. You stopover more distance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safety beltsmake such good sense.

23

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down. Andyour chance of being conscious during andafter an accident, so you can unbuckle and getout, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should Ihave to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; sothey work with safety belts — not instead ofthem. Every airbag system ever offeredfor sale has required the use of safety belts.Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,you still have to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not only in frontalcollisions, but especially in side and othercollisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive farfrom home, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passengers can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect youfrom things beyond your control, such as baddrivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number ofserious injuries and deaths occur at speeds ofless than 40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

24

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And thereare different rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, seeOlder Children on page 43 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 46. Follow those rules foreveryone’s protection.

First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how towear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. Tosee how, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull thebelt across you very quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

25

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure. If the belt is not long enough,see Safety Belt Extender on page 42.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to theheight that is right for you. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. SeeShoulder Belt Height Adjustment on page 34.

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on thesafety belt through the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

26

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the body are best ableto take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stopor crash.

27

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

28


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap beltis too loose. In a crash, you could slideunder the lap belt and apply force at yourabdomen. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries. The lap belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

29


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In acrash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.

30


A: The belt is over an armrest.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your beltgoes over an armrest like this. The beltwould be much too high. In a crash, youcan slide under the belt. The belt forcewould then be applied at the abdomen,not at the pelvic bones, and that couldcause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure thebelt goes under the armrests.

31


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. Itshould be worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.

32


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have thefull width of the belt to spread impactforces. If a belt is twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask your dealerto fix it.

33

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you candamage both the belt and your vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjustmentBefore you begin to drive, move the shoulder beltheight adjuster to the height that is right for you.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion ofthe belt is centered on your shoulder. Thebelt should be away from your face and neck, butnot falling off your shoulder. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.

To move it up or down,squeeze the releasebuttons (A) together andmove the heightadjuster to the desiredposition.

After you move the height adjuster to where youwant it, try to move it up or down withoutsqueezing the release buttons to make sure it haslocked into position.

34

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulderbelt, and the lap portion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding, throughout thepregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, itis more likely that the fetus will not be hurtin a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,the key to making safety belts effective is wearingthem properly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’ssafety belt properly, see Driver Position onpage 25.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt — exceptfor the following.

If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt outall the way, you will engage the child restraintlocking feature. If this happens, just let the belt goback all the way and start again.

When the safety belt is not in use, slide the latchplate up the safety belt webbing. The latchplate should rest on the stitching on the safetybelt, near the guide loop.

35

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers tobuckle up! Accident statistics show that unbeltedpeople in the rear seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety beltedcan be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. Andthey can strike others in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts.Here is how to wear one properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

36

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks. Pull up on the latch plate to makesure it is secure.When the shoulder belt is pulled out all theway, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all theway and start again.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 42.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder part.

37

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder andacross the chest. These parts of the body arebest able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop ora crash.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

38

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on thebuckle. For outboard seating positions, whenthe safety belt is not in use, slide the latch plateup the safety belt webbing. The latch plate shouldrest on the stitching on the safety belt, near theguide loop on the side wall.

Rear Safety Belt Comfort GuidesRear shoulder belt comfort guides may provideadded safety belt comfort for older childrenwho have outgrown booster seats and for someadults. When installed on a shoulder belt, thecomfort guide positions the belt away fromthe neck and head.

There is one guide available for each outboardpassenger position in the rear seat. Here is how toinstall a comfort guide to the safety belt:

1. Remove the guide from its storage clip on theback of the seatback.

39

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. Theelastic cord must be under the belt. Then,place the guide over the belt, and insert thetwo edges of the belt into the slots ofthe guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it liesflat. The elastic cord must be under the beltand the guide on top.

40

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly wornmay not provide the protection needed ina crash. The person wearing the beltcould be seriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder andacross the chest. These parts of the bodyare best able to take belt restrainingforces.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety beltas described in Rear Seat Passengers onpage 36. Make sure that the shoulderbelt crosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guide, squeezethe belt edges together so that you can takethem out of the guide. Slide the guide back ontoits storage clip located on the seatback.

41

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for thedriver and right front passenger. Although youcannot see them, they are part of the safety beltassembly. They help tighten the safety belts duringthe early stages of a moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crash if the threshold conditions forpretensioner activation are met.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in acrash, you will need to get new ones, andprobably other new parts for your safety beltsystem. See Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash on page 91.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealerwill order you an extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, sothe extender will be long enough for you. Tohelp avoid personal injury, do not let someone elseuse it, and use it only for the seat it is made tofit. The extender has been designed for adults.Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,just attach it to the regular safety belt. Formore information see the instruction sheet thatcomes with the extender.

42

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safetybelts?

A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder beltand get the additional restraint a shoulder beltcan provide. The shoulder belt should notcross the face or neck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, just touching thetop of the thighs. It should never be worn overthe abdomen, which could cause severe oreven fatal internal injuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics, children are saferwhen properly restrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.

43

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by onlyone person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to awindow, move the child toward the center ofthe vehicle. Also see Rear Safety BeltComfort Guides on page 39. If the child issitting in the center rear seat passengerposition, move the child toward the safety beltbuckle. In either case, be sure that theshoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, sothat in a crash the child’s upper body wouldhave the restraint that belts provide.

44

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears thebelt in this way, in a crash the child mightslide under the belt. The belt’s forcewould then be applied right on the child’sabdomen. That could cause serious orfatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

45

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! Thisincludes infants and all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, for everyone, to usesafety restraints. In fact, the law in every statein the United States and in every Canadianprovince says children up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride invehicles, they should have the protection providedby appropriate restraints. Young children shouldnot use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,unless there is no other choice. Instead, they needto use a child restraint.

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. A babydoes not weigh much — until a crash.During a crash a baby will become soheavy it is not possible to hold it. Forexample, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby willsuddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) forceon a person’s arms. A baby should besecured in an appropriate restraint.

46

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protection foradults and older children, but not for

CAUTION: (Continued)


young children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.

47

Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint shouldtake into consideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but also whether or notthe restraint will be compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, thereare many different models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,the restraint will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructionsthat come with the restraint state the weightand height limitations for a particular childrestraint. In addition, there are many kinds ofrestraints available for children withspecial needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so the crashforces can be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’s body, theback and shoulders. Infants alwaysshould be secured in appropriate infantrestraints.

48

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child isquite unlike that of an adult or older child,for whom the safety belts are designed. Ayoung child’s hip bones are still so smallthat the vehicle’s regular safety belt maynot remain low on the hip bones, as itshould. Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. Thisalone could cause serious or fatal injuries.Young children always should be securedin appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.

49

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraintwith the seating surface against the back of theinfant. The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infantpositioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.

50

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designedto improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety beltsystem. Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seatshave a five-point harness. A booster seat can alsohelp a child to see out the window.

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, orposition children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint system is aportable one, which is purchased by thevehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, anadd-on child restraint must be secured inthe vehicle. With built-in or add-on childrestraints, the child has to be secured withinthe child restraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint, besure the child restraint is designed to beused in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a labelsaying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards. Then follow the instructionsfor the restraint. You may find theseinstructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both.

51

Securing an Add-on Child Restraint inthe Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killed ina crash if the child restraint is not properlysecured in the vehicle. Make sure the childrestraint is properly installed in the vehicleusing the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCHsystem, following the instructions thatcame with that restraint, and also theinstructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the childrestraint must be secured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be secured in vehicle seatsby lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system.

See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 57 for more information. A childcan be endangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer tothe instructions that come with the restraintwhich may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

52

Securing the Child Within the ChildRestraintThere are several systems for securing the childwithin the child restraint. One system, thethree-point harness, has straps that come downover each of the infant’s shoulders and buckletogether at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, anda crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hipstraps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps thatare attached to a flat pad which rests low againstthe child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield hasstraps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shieldthat swings up or to the side.

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killed ina crash if the child is not properly securedin the child restraint. Make sure thechild is properly secured, following theinstructions that came with that restraint.

Because there are different systems, it is importantto refer to the instructions that come with therestraint. A child can be endangered in a crash ifthe child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

53

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant riding ina rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat, and an older child ridingin a booster seat.

If your vehicle has a rear seat that willaccommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a labelon your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facingchild seat in the front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great, if the airbagdeploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates.



This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint would be veryclose to the inflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

54

If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that willaccommodate a rear-facing child restraint,never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint inthe right front passenger seat unless thepassenger airbag status indicator shows off andthe airbag is off. Here is why:

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is offbefore using a rear-facing child restraintin the right front seat position.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one can



guarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints betransported in vehicles with a rear seatthat will accommodate a rear-facing childrestraint, whenever possible.


If you need to secure more than one child restraintin the rear seat, review the following illustrations.Depending on where you place the child restraintor the size of the child restraint, you may notbe able to access certain safety belt assemblies orLATCH anchors for additional passengers orchild restraints.

55

Configurations for Use of Two ChildRestraints

A. Child restraintusing LATCH

B. Occupant prohibited

A. Occupant prohibitedB. Child restraint

using LATCH

A. Child restraint usingLATCH

B. No occupantrecommended

C. Child restraint oroccupant usingsafety belt

Configurations for Use of Three ChildRestraints

A. Child restraint oroccupant usingsafety belt

A. Child restraint oroccupant usingsafety belt

B. Child restraintusing LATCH

Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure tosecure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

56

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)The LATCH system holds a child restraint duringdriving or in a crash. This system is designedto make installation of a child restraint easier. TheLATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle andattachments on the child restraint that are made foruse with the LATCH system

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraintis properly installed using the anchors, or usethe vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint with a toptether, you must also use either the lower anchorsor the safety belts to properly secure the childrestraint. A child restraint must never be installedusing only the top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,you need a child restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraint manufacturer willprovide you with instructions on how to usethe child restraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach a child restraintwith these attachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraintshave lower anchors and attachments or toptether anchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into thevehicle. There are two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that will accommodate achild restraint with lower attachments (B).

57

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the childrestraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)on the child restraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forwardmovement and rotation of the child restraintduring driving or in a crash.

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)or a dual tether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the top tether tothe anchor.

Some child restraints that have a top tether aredesigned for use with or without the top tetherbeing attached. Others require the top tetheralways to be attached. In Canada, the law requiresthat forward-facing child restraints have a toptether, and that the tether be attached. Inthe United States, some child restraints also havea top tether. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for your child restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether,one can be obtained, in kit form, for manychild restraints. Ask the child restraintmanufacturer whether or not a kit is available.

58

Lower Anchor and Top Tether AnchorLocations

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

Each rear seating position has exposed metalanchors located in the crease between theseatback and the seat cushion.

The top tether anchors for each rear seatingposition are located on the back of the rearseatback. You may need to adjust the rearcompartment storage panel/cover in the rear cargoarea to access the anchors. Be sure to use ananchor located on the same side of the vehicle asthe seating position where the child restraintwill be placed.

Rear Seat

59

Do not secure a child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s position if a national or local lawrequires that the top tether be attached, or if theinstructions that come with the child restraintsay that the top tether must be attached. There isno place to attach the top tether in this position.

Accident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat. See Where to Put the Restraint onpage 54 for additional information.

Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is notattached to anchors, the restraint willnot be able to protect the child correctly.In a crash, the child could be seriouslyinjured or killed.



Make sure that a LATCH-type childrestraint is properly installed using theanchors, or use the vehicle’s safety beltsto secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor and lower anchorin the vehicle is designed to hold only onechild restraint. Attaching more than onechild restraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachment to comeloose or even break during a crash. Achild or others could be injured if thishappens. To help prevent injury to peopleand damage to your vehicle, attach onlyone child restraint per anchor.

60

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Secure any unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pull theshoulder belt all the way out of theretractor to set the lock, if your vehicle hasone, after the child restraint has beeninstalled. Be sure to follow the instructionsof the child restraint manufacturer.

Notice: Contact between the child restraint orthe LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’ssafety belt assembly may cause damage tothese parts. Make sure when securing unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint thatthere is no contact between the child restraintor the LATCH attachment parts and thevehicle’s safety belt assembly.

Folding an empty rear seat with the safetybelts secured may cause damage to the safetybelt or the seat. When removing the childrestraint, always remember to return the safetybelts to their normal, stowed position beforefolding the rear seat.

A. Passenger’s Side Rear Seat Lower AnchorsB. Center Rear Seat Lower AnchorsC. Driver’s Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors

61

Make sure to attach the child restraint at theproper anchor location.

This system is designed to make installation ofchild restraints easier. When using lower anchors,do not use the vehicle’s safety belts. Insteaduse the vehicle’s anchors and child restraintattachments to secure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicle anchor tosecure a top tether.

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments tothe lower anchors. If the child restraint doesnot have lower attachments or the desiredseating position does not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with the top tetherand the safety belts. Refer to your childrestraint manufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.1.3. Attach and tighten the lower

attachments on the child restraint tothe lower anchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommendsthat the top tether be attached, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,if equipped. Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. You may need to adjust the rear

compartment storage panel/cover inthe rear cargo area to access theanchors. See Rear CompartmentStorage Panel/Cover on page 140.

2.3. Route, attach and tighten the top tetheraccording to your child restraintinstructions and the followinginstructions:

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint andyou are using a singletether, route thetether over theseatback.

62

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint andyou are using a dualtether, route thetether over theseatback.

If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether aroundthe head restraint.

If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead restraint andyou are using a singletether, raise thehead restraint and routethe tether under thehead restraint andin between the headrestraint posts.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

63

Securing a Child Restraint in aRear Seat PositionIf your child restraint has the LATCH system,see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 57.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint in this position. Besure to follow the instructions that came with thechild restraint. Secure the child in the child restraintwhen and as the instructions say.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

64

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt, andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt.

65

6. If your child restraint manufacturerrecommends using a top tether, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.Refer to the instructions that came with thechild restraint and to Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH) on page 57.


To remove the child restraint, if the top tether isattached, disconnect it. Unbuckle the vehicle’ssafety belt and let it go back all the way. Thesafety belt will move freely again and be ready towork for an adult or larger child passenger.For outboard seating positions, when the safetybelt is not in use, slide the latch plate up the safetybelt webbing. The latch plate should rest on thestitching on the safety belt, near the upper anchoron the side wall.

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionYour vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag.A rear seat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. See Where to Putthe Restraint on page 54.

In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem. The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag when an infant in a rear-facing infantseat or a small child in a forward-facing childrestraint or booster seat is detected. SeePassenger Sensing System on page 82 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 177 formore information on this including importantsafety information.

66

If your vehicle has a rear seat that willaccommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a labelon your sun visor that says, “Never put arear-facing child seat in the front.” This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag if thesystem detects a rear-facing childrestraint, no system is fail-safe, and no



one can guarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusual circumstance,even though it is turned off. Werecommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbag is off.


67


{CAUTION:







If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat position, move theseat as far back as it will go before securingthe forward-facing child restraint. See ManualSeats on page 8 or Power Seat on page 10.

If your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 57.

68

There is no top tether anchor at the right frontseating position. Do not secure a child seat in thisposition if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored or if the instructionsthat come with the child restraint say that the toptether must be anchored. See Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 57 ifthe child restraint has a top tether.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’sfrontal airbag. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 82. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be secured in a rearseat, even if the airbag is off. If your childrestraint is forward-facing, move the seat asfar back as it will go before securing thechild restraint in this seat. See Manual Seatson page 8 or Power Seat on page 10.

When the passenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passenger’s frontalairbag, the off indicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator should light and stay litwhen you turn the ignition to RUN or START.See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator onpage 177.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

69

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt, andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt. You should not be ableto pull more of the belt from the retractoronce the lock has been set.

70


8. If the airbag is off, the off indicator on theinstrument panel will be lit and stay litwhen the key is turned to RUN or START.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. Ifthis happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle ifone is available and check with your dealer.

To remove the child restraint, if the top tether isattached to the top tether anchor, disconnectit. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it goback all the way. The safety belt will movefreely again and be ready to work for an adult orlarger child passenger.

When the safety belt is not in use, slide the latchplate up the safety belt webbing. The latchplate should rest on the stitching on the safetybelt, near the guide loop on the side wall.

71

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver anda frontal airbag for the right front passenger.Your vehicle may also have roof-mounted sideimpact airbags designed for either side impact orrollover deployment. Roof-mounted side impactairbags are available for the driver and thepassenger seated directly behind the driver andfor the right front passenger and the passengerseated directly behind that passenger.

If your vehicle has roof-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG will appear onthe airbag covering on the headliner near thedriver’s and right front passenger’s window.

Even if you have no right front passenger seat inyour vehicle there is still an active frontal airbagin the right side of the instrument panel. Donot place cargo in front of this airbag.

{CAUTION:

Be sure that cargo is not near an airbag.In a crash, an inflating airbag might forcethat object toward a person. This couldcause severe injury or even death. Secureobjects away from the area in which anairbag would inflate. For moreinformation, see Where Are the Airbags?on page 75 and Loading Your Vehicle onpage 321.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Even though today’sairbags are also designed to help reduce the riskof injury from the force of an inflating bag, allairbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.

72

Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in acrash if you are not wearing your safetybelt — even if you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it.Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designedto work with safety belts but do notreplace them.

Frontal airbags for the driver and rightfront passenger are designed to deploy inmoderate to severe frontal and nearfrontal crashes. They are not designed to



inflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in manyside crashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, frontal airbags may provideless protection in frontal crashes thanmore forceful airbags have provided inthe past.

Roof-mounted side impact airbags aredesigned to inflate in moderate to severecrashes where something hits the side ofyour vehicle. They are not designed toinflate in frontal or in rear crashes. If thevehicle is equipped with rollover capableairbags, it has been designed to deploythe roof-mounted side impact airbags inthe event of a vehicle rollover. Everyonein your vehicle should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is anairbag for that person.

73

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and roof-mounted side impactairbags inflate with great force, faster thanthe blink of an eye. If you are too close toan inflating airbag, as you would be if youwere leaning forward, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts help keep you inposition for airbag inflation before andduring a crash. Always wear your safetybelt even with frontal airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible whilestill maintaining control of the vehicle.Occupants should not lean on or sleepagainst the door.

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer the bestprotection for adults, but not for youngchildren and infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Young children andinfants need the protection that a childrestraint system can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in your vehicle.To read how, see Older Children onpage 43 or Infants and Young Children onpage 46.

74

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel cluster,which shows theairbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 176 for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

75

The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

If your vehicle has a roof-mounted airbag for thedriver and the person seated directly behindthe driver, it is located in the ceiling above the sidewindows.

76

If your vehicle has a roof-mounted airbag for theright front passenger and the person directlybehind that passenger, it is located in the ceilingabove the side windows.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant andan airbag, the bag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbag mustbe kept clear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and an airbag, anddo not attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near anyother airbag covering. And, if your vehiclehas roof-mounted side impact airbags,never secure anything to the roof of yourvehicle by routing the rope or tie downthrough any door or window opening. Ifyou do, the path of an inflating sideimpact airbag will be blocked. The path ofan inflating airbag must be kept clear.

77

When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontalairbags are designed to inflate in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they aredesigned to inflate only if the impact exceeds apredetermined deployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds take into account a variety of desireddeployment and non-deployment events and areused to predict how severe a crash is likely to be intime for the airbags to inflate and help restrain theoccupants. Whether your frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on how fast your vehicleis traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, thedirection of the impact, and how quickly yourvehicle slows down.

In addition, your vehicle has “dual-stage” frontalairbags, which adjust the restraint accordingto crash severity. Your vehicle has electronicfrontal sensors which help the sensing systemdistinguish between a moderate frontal impact anda more severe frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, these airbags inflate at a level lessthan full deployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs. If the front of yourvehicle goes straight into a wall that does notmove or deform, the threshold level for thereduced deployment is about 11 to 16 mph(17 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for a fulldeployment is about 20 to 25 mph (32 to 40 km/h).The threshold level can vary, however, withspecific vehicle design, so that it can be somewhatabove or below this range.

78

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crashspeeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, theairbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits an object thatdoes not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle goes straight into theobject.

Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)are not intended to inflate during vehiclerollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

Your vehicle may or may not have roof-mountedairbags and a rollover sensor. See AirbagSystem on page 72. These “rollover capable”airbags are intended to inflate in moderateto severe side crashes or during a rollover. Aroof-mounted side impact airbag will inflate if thecrash severity is above the system’s designed“threshold level.” The threshold level can vary withspecific vehicle design. Roof-mounted sideimpact airbags are not intended to inflate in rearimpacts. Both roof-mounted rollover airbagswill deploy when either side of the vehicle is struckor during a rollover.

In any particular crash, no one can say whetheran airbag should have inflated simply becauseof the damage to a vehicle or because of what therepair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits, the angleof the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slowsdown. For roof-mounted side impact airbags,inflation is determined by the location and severityof the impact.

79

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbagsensing system detects that the vehicle isin a crash. Additionally, in the case of a “rollovercapable” roof-mounted side impact airbag, thesensing system detects that the vehicle is about toroll over. The sensing system triggers a releaseof gas from the inflator, which inflates the airbag.

For the frontal airbags, the inflator, airbag, andrelated hardware are all part of the airbag modulesinside the steering wheel and in the instrumentpanel in front of the right front passenger.For vehicles with roof-mounted rollover airbags,the airbag modules, the inflator, and the airbagsare located in the ceiling of the vehicle, nearthe side windows.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contact thesteering wheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.Airbags supplement the protection providedby safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over the occupant’s upperbody, stopping the occupant more gradually. Butthe frontal airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including rollovers, rearimpacts, and many side impacts, primarily becausean occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag.Roof-mounted rollover airbags would not help youin many types of collisions, including manyfrontal or near frontal collisions, and rear impacts.

Airbags should never be regarded as anythingmore than a supplement to safety belts, and thenonly in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions for the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderateto severe side collisions or rollovers for vehicleswith roof-mounted rollover airbags.

80

What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After a frontal airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, soquickly that some people may not even realizean airbag inflated. Roof-mounted rollover airbagsmay still be at least partially inflated minutesafter the vehicle comes to rest. Some componentsof the airbag module — the steering wheel hubfor the driver’s airbag, the instrument panel for theright front passenger’s airbag, and the areaalong the ceiling of the vehicle near the sidewindows for vehicles with roof–mounted sideimpact airbags — may be hot for a short time. Theparts of the airbag that come into contact withyou may be warm, but not too hot to touch. Theremay be some smoke and dust coming from thevents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation doesnot prevent the driver from seeing out of thewindshield or being able to steer the vehicle, nordoes it prevent people from leaving the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may bedust in the air. This dust could causebreathing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon as it issafe to do so. If you have breathingproblems but cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems followingan airbag deployment, you should seekmedical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on,and flash the hazard warning flashers when theairbags inflate. You can lock the doors again, turnthe interior lamps off, and turn off the hazardwarning flashers by using the controls for thosefeatures.

81

In many crashes severe enough to inflate theairbag, windshields are broken by vehicledeformation. Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the right front passengerairbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.After an airbag inflates, you will needsome new parts for your airbag system. If youdo not get them, the airbag system will notbe there to help protect you in another crash.A new system will include airbag modulesand possibly other parts. The service manualfor your vehicle covers the need to replaceother parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection andEvent Data Recorders on page 468.

• Let only qualified technicians work on theairbag system. Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not work properly. Seeyour dealer for service.

Passenger Sensing SystemYour vehicle has a passenger sensing system.The passenger airbag status indicator on theinstrument panel will be visible when you turn yourignition key to RUN or START.

The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on andoff, will be visible during the system check.When the system check is complete, either theword ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on orthe symbol for off will be visible. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 177.

The passenger sensing system will turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver’s airbags are not part ofthe passenger sensing system.

United States Canada

82

The passenger sensing system works withsensors that are part of the right front passenger’sseat. The sensors are designed to detect thepresence of a properly seated occupant anddetermine if the passenger’s frontal airbag shouldbe enabled (may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant riding ina rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat, and an older child ridingin a booster seat.

If your vehicle has a rear seat that willaccommodate a rear-facing child restraint, there isa label on your sun visor that says, “Never puta rear-facing child seat in the front.” This isbecause the risk to the rear-facing child is so greatif the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.



83


{CAUTION:







84

The passenger sensing system is designed to turnoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.

• The system determines that an infant ispresent in a rear-facing infant seat.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a forward-facing child restraint.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a booster seat.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weight offof the seat for a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat is occupied bya smaller person, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger’s frontal airbag has beenturned off by the passenger sensing system, the offindicator on the instrument panel will light andstay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint following the child restraintmanufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing aChild Restraint in the Right Front Seat Positionon page 66.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. Ifthis happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle ifone is available and check with your dealer.

85

The passenger sensing system is designed toenable (may inflate) the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag anytime the system sensesthat a person of adult size is sitting properly in theright front passenger’s seat. When the passengersensing system has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is active.

For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag, dependingupon the person’s seating posture and body build.Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrownchild restraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is an airbag forthat person.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, itcould be because that person is not sitting properlyin the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle offand ask the person to place the seatback inthe fully upright position, then sit upright in theseat, centered on the seat cushion, with theperson’s legs comfortably extended.

Restart the vehicle and have the person remain inthis position for about two minutes. This willallow the system to detect that person and thenenable the passenger’s airbag.

86

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that somethingmay be wrong with the airbag system. Ifthis ever happens, have the vehicleserviced promptly, because an adult-sizeperson sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat may not have theprotection of the frontal airbag. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 176 formore on this, including important safetyinformation.

A thick layer of additional material such as ablanket, or aftermarket equipment such as seatcovers, seat heaters, and seat massagerscan affect how well the passenger sensing systemoperates. Remove any additional material fromthe seat cushion before reinstalling or securing thechild restraint and before a small occupant,including a small adult, sits in the passengerposition.

You may want to consider not using seat coversor other aftermarket equipment if your vehiclehas the passenger sensing system. See AddingEquipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicleon page 89 for more information aboutmodifications that can affect how the systemoperates.

{CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger’sseat or between the passenger’s seatcushion and seatback may interfere withthe proper operation of the passengersensing system.

87

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should beserviced. There are parts of the airbag system inseveral places around your vehicle. You donot want the system to inflate while someone isworking on your vehicle. Your dealer and theservice manual have information about servicingyour vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase aservice manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 474.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition isturned off and the battery is disconnected,an airbag can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you areclose to an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They are probably partof the airbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, and make surethe person performing work for you isqualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

88

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to the frontor sides of the vehicle that could keep theairbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,front end or side sheet metal, they may keepthe airbag system from working properly.Also, the airbag system may not work properlyif you relocate any of the airbag sensors. Ifyou have any questions about this, you shouldcontact Customer Assistance before youmodify your vehicle. The phone numbers andaddresses for Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 456.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of thefront seats, safety belts, the airbag sensingand diagnostic module, rollover sensormodule, instrument panel, steering wheel,ceiling headliner, ceiling and pillar garnish trim,roof-mounted rollover airbag modules, orairbag wiring can affect the operation of theairbag system. If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. The phone numbersand addresses for Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 456.

89

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors and anchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damaged safetybelt system parts. If you see anything that mightkeep a safety belt system from doing its job, haveit repaired. See Care of Safety Belts on page 424for more information.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbagcovers, and have them repaired or replaced. Theairbag system does not need regular maintenance.

Notice: If you damage the covering for thedriver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag, orthe side impact airbag covering (if equipped) onthe ceiling near the side windows, the airbagmay not work properly. You may have to replacethe airbag module in the steering wheel, boththe airbag module and the instrument panel forthe right front passenger’s airbag, or sideimpact airbag module and ceiling covering forroof-mounted side impact airbags (if equipped.)Do not open or break the airbag coverings.

90

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To help makesure your restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts orLATCH system parts?After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched, as theywould be if worn during a more severe crash,then you need new parts.If the LATCH system was being used during amore severe crash, you may need new LATCHsystem parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.Collision damage also may mean you will need tohave LATCH system, safety belt or seat partsrepaired or replaced. New parts and repairs maybe necessary even if the belt or LATCH systemwas not being used at the time of the collision.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part on the airbag systemearlier in this section.

If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need toreplace the driver and front passenger’s safety beltretractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then thenew retractor assembly will be there to help protectyou in a collision.

After a crash you may need to replace the driverand front passenger’s safety belt retractorassemblies, even if the frontal airbags have notdeployed. The driver and front passenger’s safetybelt retractor assemblies contain the safety beltpretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensionerschecked if your vehicle has been in a collision,or if your airbag readiness light stays on after youstart your vehicle or while you are driving. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 176.

91

✍ NOTES

92

Keys .............................................................. 95Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 96Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System

Operation ................................................. 97Doors and Locks ........................................ 104

Door Locks ................................................ 104Power Door Locks ..................................... 105Delayed Locking ........................................ 105Programmable Automatic Door Locks ........ 105Rear Door Security Locks ......................... 106Lockout Protection ..................................... 106Liftgate ...................................................... 107

Windows ...................................................... 109Power Windows ........................................ 110Sun Visors ................................................ 110

Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 111Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 111PASS-Key® III+ ......................................... 112PASS-Key® III+ Operation ......................... 113

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 114New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 114Ignition Positions ....................................... 115Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 116Starting the Engine .................................... 116Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 118Automatic Transaxle Operation .................. 119Parking Brake ........................................... 122Shifting Into Park (P) ................................. 123Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................. 125Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 126Engine Exhaust ......................................... 127Running the Engine While Parked ............. 128

Mirrors ......................................................... 129Manual Rearview Mirror ............................. 129Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ....... 129Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with

OnStar® and Compass ........................... 129Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with

Compass ............................................... 131Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 132Outside Convex Mirrors ............................. 133

Section 2 Features and Controls

93

OnStar® System .......................................... 133Storage Areas ............................................. 137

Glove Box ................................................. 137Cupholder(s) .............................................. 137Center Console Storage Area .................... 138Luggage Carrier ........................................ 138

Rear Compartment Storage Panel/Cover ... 140Rear Seat Armrest .................................... 141Table ........................................................ 142Convenience Net ....................................... 143

Sunroof ....................................................... 143

Section 2 Features and Controls

94

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons. They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or even makethe vehicle move. The children or otherscould be badly injured or even killed.Do not leave the keys in a vehicle withchildren.

95

One key is used for the ignition and all of the locks.

Key code information can be obtained by yourdealer. These code numbers can be used to makenew keys. Additional keys that are needed canbe made at any retail service facility provided youhave the key code information. Store thisinformation in a safe place, but not in your vehicle.

Have extra keys made. Your service partsdepartment can make extra keys for you.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in yourvehicle, you may have to damage the vehicleto get in. Be sure you have spare keys.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)SystemThe remote keyless entry system operates on aradio frequency subject to FederalCommunications Commission (FCC) Rules andwith Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

• This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

• This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

• This device may not cause interference.

• This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

96

Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

At times you may notice a decrease in range. Thisis normal for any remote keyless entry system.If the transmitter does not work or if you have tostand closer to your vehicle for the transmitterto work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too far fromyour vehicle. You may need to stand closerduring rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few stepsto the left or right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement orresynchronization is necessary. See “BatteryReplacement” and “Resynchronization”under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 97.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealeror a qualified technician for service.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System OperationThe vehicle’s doors can be locked and unlockedfrom about 3 feet (1 m) up to 65 feet (20 m)away with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

If your vehicle has the remote start feature youcan also start your vehicle with the RKEtransmitter. Your RKE transmitter, with the remotestart button, provides an increased range of195 feet (60 m) away. However, the range may beless while the vehicle is running. As a result,you may need to be closer to your vehicle to turnit off than you were to turn it on.

There are other conditions which can affect theperformance of the transmitter. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System on page 96.

97

The following functions may be available if yourvehicle has the RKE system:

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle hasthis feature, it may be started from outsidethe vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See“Remote Vehicle Start” following, for more detailedinformation.

Q (Lock): Press the lock button to lock the doorsand liftgate. If enabled through the DriverInformation Center (DIC), the parking lamps willflash once to indicate locking has occurred.If enabled through the DIC, the horn will chirp whenthe lock button is pressed again within five secondsof the previous press of the lock button. See DICVehicle Personalization on page 210 for additionalinformation. Pressing the lock button may arm thecontent theft-deterrent system. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 111.

K (Unlock): Press the unlock button to unlockthe driver’s door. If the button is pressedagain within five seconds, all remaining doors, andthe liftgate, will unlock. The interior lamps willcome on and stay on for 20 seconds or until theignition is turned on. If enabled through theDIC, the parking lamps will flash once to indicateunlocking has occurred. See DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 210. Pressing the unlockbutton on the RKE transmitter will disarm thecontent theft-deterrent system. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 111.

Remote Keyless Entrywith Remote Start

Remote Keyless Entrywithout Remote Start

98

L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press andrelease this button to locate your vehicle. The turnsignal lamps will flash and the horn will soundthree times. Press and hold this button for morethan two seconds to activate the panic alarm. Theturn signal lamps will flash and the horn willsound repeatedly for 30 seconds. The alarm willturn off when the ignition is moved to RUN orthe alarm button is pressed again. The ignitionmust be in LOCK for the panic alarm to work.

The RKE transmitter is used to arm/disarmthe content theft-deterrent system. Your vehicle’stheft-deterrent system can be programmed tothree different modes. See Content Theft-Deterrenton page 111

If you accidentally set off the alarm when enteringor exiting the vehicle, you can shut it off bypressing the lock or unlock button once or thepanic alarm button twice.

Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach RKE transmitter is coded to prevent anothertransmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can bepurchased through your dealer. Remember to bringany additional transmitters so they can also bere-coded to match the new transmitter. Once yourdealer has coded the new transmitter, the losttransmitter will not unlock your vehicle. The vehiclecan have a maximum of four transmitters matchedto it. Or, see “Relearn Remote Key” under DICOperation and Displays on page 195 forinstructions on how to match RKE transmitters toyour vehicle.

99

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your RKEtransmitter should last about four years.

The battery is weak if the transmitter will not workat the normal range in any location. If you haveto get close to your vehicle before the transmitterworks, it is probably time to change the battery.

Notice: When replacing the battery, usecare not to touch any of the circuitry. Staticfrom your body transferred to these surfacesmay damage the transmitter.

To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter, dothe following:

1. Use a flat thin object to pry open thetransmitter.

2. Once the transmitter is separated, use apencil or similar object to remove the oldbattery. Do not use a metal object.

3. Slide the new battery into the transmitter withthe positive side of the battery facing down.Use a type CR2032 battery, or equivalent type.

4. Snap the transmitter back together tightly tobe sure no moisture can enter.

5. Check the operation of the transmitter.

100

Remote Vehicle StartYour vehicle may have the remote start feature.This feature allows you to start the enginefrom outside the vehicle. See “REMOTE START”under DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 210for instructions on how to enable and disable thisfeature.

During a remote start, the climate control systemwill turn on at the fan, temperature, and modesettings the vehicle was set to when the vehiclewas last turned off and will also turn on therear window defogger.

Laws in some local communities may restrict theuse of remote starters. For example, somelaws may require a person using remote start tohave the vehicle in view when doing so. Checklocal regulations for any requirements on remotestarting of vehicles.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Press and releasethe lock button and then press and hold the remotevehicle start button to start the vehicle.

Your RKE transmitter, with the remote start button,provides an increased range of operation.However, the range may be less while the vehicleis running. As a result, you may need to becloser to your vehicle to turn it off, than you wereto turn it on.

If your vehicle is low on fuel, do not use the remotestart feature. The vehicle may run out of fuel.

To start the engine using the remote start feature,do the following:

1. Aim the RKE transmitter, that has a remotevehicle start button, at the vehicle.

2. Press and release the transmitter’s lockbutton, then immediately press and holdthe remote vehicle start button until thevehicle’s turn signal lamps flash, or for atleast four seconds, if the vehicle’s lights arenot visible. The vehicle’s doors will be locked.Pressing the remote start button again after thevehicle has started will turn off the ignition.

101

3. When the vehicle’s engine starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on while theengine is running.

4. If it is your first remote start since last driving,repeat these steps while the engine is stillrunning for a 10 minute time extension.

When you enter the vehicle during a remote start,and the engine is still running, turn the key tothe RUN position to drive the vehicle.

After a remote start, the engine will automaticallyshut off after 10 minutes unless a time extensionhas been done or the vehicle’s key is inserted intothe ignition switch and turned to RUN.

The maximum number of remote starts or remotestart attempts between ignition cycles with thekey is two.

If the remote start procedure is used again beforethe first 10 minute time frame has ended, thefirst 10 minutes will immediately expire andthe second 10 minute time frame will start.

For example, if the lock button and then theremote start buttons are pressed again after thevehicle has been running for five minutes,10 minutes are added, allowing the engine to runfor 15 minutes.

After your vehicle’s engine has been startedtwo times using the remote vehicle start button,the vehicle’s ignition switch must be turned to RUNand then back to LOCK using the key beforethe remote start procedure can be used again.

To manually shut off the engine after a remotestart, do any of the following:

• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle andpress the remote start button until theparking lamps turn off.

• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

• Insert the vehicle’s key into the ignitionswitch and turn the switch to RUN and thenback to LOCK.

102

The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if:

• The vehicle’s key is in the ignition.

• The vehicle’s hood, liftgate or doors arenot closed.

• The hazard warning flashers are on.

• There is an emission control systemmalfunction.

• The engine coolant temperature is too high.

• The oil pressure is low.

• Two remote vehicle starts have already beenused. The maximum number of remote startsor remote start attempts between ignitioncycles with the key is two.

Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start featureare shipped from the factory with the remotevehicle start system enabled. The system may beenabled or disabled through the DIC. See“REMOTE START” under DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 210 for additionalinformation.

Remote Start ReadyIf your vehicle does not have the remote vehiclestart feature, it may have the remote startready feature. This feature allows your dealer toadd the manufacturer’s remote vehicle startfeature.

If your vehicle has the remote start ready feature,your RKE transmitter will have extended rangethat will allow you to lock or unlock your vehiclefrom approximately 195 feet (60 m) away.

See your dealer if you would like to add themanufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature to yourvehicle.

103

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can

easily open the doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will not open it.You increase the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a crash ifthe doors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.



• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out.A child can be overcome by extremeheat and can suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow downor stop your vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent this fromhappening.

There are a couple of ways to manually lock orunlock your vehicle.

From the outside, use the key in the driver’s door.

From the inside, use the lock control on the door.

104

Power Door Locks

The power door lockswitches are located onthe driver’s and frontpassenger’s doors.

K (Unlock): To unlock the doors, press theunlock symbol.

Q (Lock): Remove the ignition key and pressthe lock symbol to lock all of the doors.

Delayed LockingA chime will sound three times to indicate a dooror liftgate is open when you try to lock thedoors with the remote keyless entry (RKE)transmitter or the power door lock switch. Thedoors will not lock, and the theft-deterrent systemwill not arm until all the doors are closed andten seconds have passed.

The delayed locking feature can be programmedthrough the Driver Information Center (DIC).See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 210.

Programmable AutomaticDoor LocksYour vehicle has an automatic lock/unlock featurewhich enables you to program the power doorlocks through the Driver Information Center (DIC).See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 210for more information on DIC programming.

105

Rear Door Security LocksYour vehicle has rear door security locks thatprevent passengers from opening the rear doorsfrom the inside.

The rear door securitylocks are located on theinside edge of eachrear door. Youmust open the reardoors to access them.

To set the security locks, do the following:

1. Insert the key into the lock above the reardoor security lock label and turn it to thehorizontal position.

2. Close the door.

3. Repeat the steps for the other rear door.

To open a rear door while the security lock is on,do the following:

1. Unlock the door using the remote keylessentry transmitter, the front door power lockswitch, or by lifting the rear door manual lock.

2. Open the door from the outside.

To cancel the rear door security lock, do thefollowing:

1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.

2. Insert the key into the slot next to the reardoor security lock label and turn it to thevertical position.

3. Repeat the steps for the other lock.

Lockout ProtectionIf you press the power door lock switch when thekey is in the ignition and any door is open, allthe doors will lock and only the driver’s door willunlock. Be sure to remove the key from the ignitionwhen locking your vehicle.

If the keyless entry transmitter is used to lock thedoors and the key is in the ignition, a chimewill sound three times. All passenger doors willlock, but the driver’s door will remain unlocked.

106

Liftgate

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with theliftgate or liftglass open because carbonmonoxide (CO) gas can come into yourvehicle. You cannot see or smell CO.It can cause unconsciousness and evendeath. If you must drive with the liftgateopen or if electrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the liftgate orliftglass:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your climate control

system to its highest speed and selectthe control setting that will forceoutside air into your vehicle. See“Climate Control System” in the Index.

• If you have air outlets on or under theinstrument panel, open them all theway. See Engine Exhaust on page 127.

To unlock the liftgate, press the unlock button onthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmittertwice or use the power door lock switch.

To lock the liftgate, press the lock button on theRKE transmitter or use the power door lock switch.The liftgate does not have a key lock cylinder.

To open the liftgate, pull up on the handle locatedin the center of the liftgate.

When closing the liftgate, use the molded handlesto pull the liftgate down. Push the liftgate closeduntil it latches.

107

Liftgate Operation with Loss of PowerThe liftgate is equipped with an electric latch. Ifthe battery is disconnected or has low voltage, theliftgate will not open.

To open the liftgate ifthis happens, removethe interior trimplug located at the baseof the liftgate frominside the vehicle.

Use a tool to push theservice release leverlocated on the latch untilyou hear or feel thegate release.

The liftgate can now be opened and closedmanually. You will need to use this procedure toopen the liftgate until the power is restored.

108

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome by theextreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.

109

Power Windows

The window switches for all doors are located onthe center console. A window switch for eachrear window is located on each rear door.

To open a window, press the bottom of the switch.To close a window, press the top of the switch.

The power windows operate when the ignitionis RUN or ACC (Accessory), or while in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) on page 116.

Express-Down WindowThe driver’s window switch has an express-downfeature that allows the window to be loweredwithout holding the switch. Press the bottom of theswitch part way, and the driver’s window willopen a small amount. Press the switch down allthe way down and release it and the windowwill go down automatically.

To stop the window while it is lowering, press andrelease the top of the switch.

Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): Your vehicle has a lockoutfeature to prevent rear seat passengers fromoperating the windows. Press the lockout button,located with the power window switches, to turn thefeature on and off. The window switch has a lightthat will come on when the switch is active.

Sun VisorsTo block out glare, swing the sun visor down. Youcan also detach the driver’s sun visor from thecenter mount and slide it along the rod fromside-to-side for greater coverage.

110

Visor Vanity MirrorsYour vehicle has covered visor vanity mirrors onboth the driver’s and passenger’s side.

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent features, we know that nothing weput on it can make it impossible to steal.

Content Theft-DeterrentTo activate the theft-deterrent system:

1. Open the door.

2. Lock the door with the power door lockswitch or the remote keyless entry transmitter.If you are using the remote keyless entrytransmitter, the door does not need tobe open.

3. Close all doors.

Once armed, the alarm will go off if someone triesto enter the vehicle without using the remotekeyless entry transmitter or a key or turnsthe ignition on with an incorrect key. The horn willsound and the turn signal lamps will flash forapproximately two minutes.

When the alarm is armed, the trunk may beopened with the remote keyless entry transmitter.The power door lock switches are disabledand the doors remain locked. You must use yourremote keyless entry transmitter or your key tounlock the doors when the system is armed.

Arming with the Power Lock SwitchThe alarm system will arm when you use eitherpower lock switch to lock the doors while any dooror the trunk is open and the key is removedfrom the ignition.

Arming with the Remote Keyless EntryTransmitterThe alarm system will arm when you use yourremote keyless entry transmitter to lock the doors,if the key is not in the ignition.

111

Disarming with the Remote KeylessEntry TransmitterThe alarm system will disarm when you use yourremote keyless entry transmitter to unlock thedoors.

The first time a remote unlock command isreceived, three flashes will be seen and three hornchirps heard to indicate an alarm condition hasoccurred since last arming.

Disarming with Your KeyThe alarm system will disarm when you use yourkey to unlock the doors or insert your key inignition and turn it from the LOCK position.

PASS-Key® III+The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with IndustryCanada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.


PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequencytransponder in the key that matches a decoder inyour vehicle.

112

PASS-Key® III+ OperationYour vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (PersonalizedAutomotive Security System) theft-deterrentsystem. PASS-Key® III+ is a passivetheft-deterrent system. This means you do nothave to do anything special to arm or disarm thesystem. It works when you transition the keyto RUN, ACC or START from the LOCK position.

When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses thatsomeone is using the wrong key, it prevents thevehicle from starting. Anyone using a trial-and-errormethod to start the vehicle will be discouragedbecause of the high number of electrical key codes.

If the engine does not start and the security lighton the instrument panel comes on when tryingto start the vehicle, the key may have a damagedtransponder. Turn the ignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, and the keyappears to be undamaged, try another ignitionkey. At this time, you may also want to check thefuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 431. If the engine still does not start with theother key, your vehicle needs service. If yourvehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. Seeyour dealer who can service the PASS-Key® III+to have a new key made. In an emergency,contact Roadside Assistance.

It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to“learn” the transponder value of a new orreplacement key. Up to nine additional keys maybe programmed for the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programming additional keys only.If all the currently programmed keys are lost ordo not operate, you must see your dealer ora locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ tohave keys made and programmed to the system.

See your dealer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cutexactly as the ignition key that operates thesystem.

113

To program the new additional key do thefollowing:

1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.

2. Insert the original, already programmed, keyin the ignition and start the engine. If theengine will not start, see your dealerfor service.

3. After the engine has started, turn the key toLOCK, and remove the key.

4. Insert the new key to be programmed and turnit to the RUN position within five seconds ofremoving the original key.

5. The security light will turn off once the keyhas been programmed.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keysare to be programmed.

If you are driving and the security light comes onand stays on, you may be able to restart yourengine. Your PASS-Key® III+ system, however,may not be working properly and must be servicedby your dealer.

If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key,see your dealer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.

Starting and Operating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-In

Notice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow these guidelines:• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast

or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Donot make full-throttle starts. Avoiddownshifting to brake, or slow, the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles (322 km) or so. During this timeyour new brake linings are not yet brokenin. Hard stops with new linings can meanpremature wear and earlier replacement.Follow this breaking-in guideline every timeyou get new brake linings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. SeeTowing a Trailer on page 328 for the trailertowing capabilities of your vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break-in, engine speed and load canbe gradually increased.

114

Ignition Positions

With the key in theignition switch, you canturn it to four differentpositions. A warningtone will sound ifyou open the driver’sdoor when the keyhas not been removedfrom the ignition.

Notice: Using a tool to force the key from theignition switch could cause damage orbreak the key. Use the correct key and turn thekey only with your hand. Make sure the keyis in all the way. If none of this works,then your vehicle needs service.

9 (LOCK): You will only be able to remove yourkey when the ignition is turned to LOCK.

The ignition switch cannot be turned to LOCKunless the shift lever is in PARK (P).

ACC (Accessory): This position operates someof your electrical accessories.

R (RUN): This is the position the switch returnsto after you start your engine and release theswitch. The switch stays in the RUN position whenthe engine is running. But even when the engineis not running, you can use RUN to operateyour electrical accessories and to display somewarning and indicator lights.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ACC or RUN position with the engineoff. You may not be able to start your vehicle ifthe battery is allowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

/ (START): This position starts the engine.When the engine starts, release the key.The ignition switch will return to RUN for normaldriving.

115

Key In the IgnitionNever leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as itis an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If youleave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,a chime will sound, when you open the driver’sdoor. Always remember to remove your key fromthe ignition and take it with you. This will lockyour ignition and transaxle. Also, always rememberto lock the doors.The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ignition while your vehicle is parked.You may not be able to start your vehicle after ithas been parked for an extended period of time.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)Your vehicle has a Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) feature which will allow the radio,power windows and sunroof to continue to work upto 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off orthe driver’s door is opened.

All these features will work when the ignition keyis in RUN or ACC.

Starting the EnginePlace the transaxle in the proper gear.

Automatic TransaxleMove your shift lever to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start inany other position — this is a safety feature.To restart when you are already moving,use NEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehiclemoving could damage the transaxle. Shift intoPARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.

Manual TransaxleThe shift lever should be in the neutral positionand the parking brake engaged. Hold theclutch pedal to the floor and start the engine. Yourvehicle will not start if the clutch pedal is not allthe way down. That is a safety feature.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn

the ignition key to START. When the enginestarts, let go of the key. The idle speed will godown as your engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediately after starting it.Operate the engine and transaxle gentlyto allow the oil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.

116

Your vehicle has a Computer-ControlledCranking System. This feature assists instarting the engine and protects components.If the ignition key is turned to the STARTposition, and then released when the enginebegins cranking, the engine will continuecranking for a few seconds or until the vehiclestarts. If the engine does not start and thekey is held in START for many seconds,cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds toprevent cranking motor damage. To preventgear damage, this system also preventscranking if the engine is already running.Engine cranking can be stopped by turning theignition switch to the ACC or LOCK position.

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periodsof time, by returning the key to the STARTposition immediately after cranking has ended,can overheat and damage the crankingmotor, and drain the battery. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allowthe cranking motor to cool down.

2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,especially in very cold weather (below 0°For −18°C), it could be flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and holding itthere as you hold the key in START for up toa maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the key and accelerator.If the vehicle starts briefly but then stopsagain, do the same thing. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do not race theengine immediately after starting it. Operatethe engine and transaxle gently until theoil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work withthe electronics in your vehicle. If you addelectrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check withyour dealer. If you do not, your engine mightnot perform properly. Any resulting damagewould not be covered by your vehicle’swarranty.

117

Engine Coolant HeaterIf your vehicle has this feature, in very coldweather 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine coolantheater can help. You will get easier startingand better fuel economy during engine warm-up.Usually, the coolant heater should be pluggedin a minimum of four hours prior to starting yourvehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use ofthe coolant heater is not required. Your vehiclemay also have an internal thermostat in theplug end of the cord. This will prevent operation ofthe engine coolant heater when the temperatureis at or above 0°F (−18°C) as noted on the cord.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electricalcord. The cord is located on the passenger’sside of the engine compartment, near theradiator.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt ACoutlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungroundedoutlet could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plug the cordinto a properly grounded three-prong110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will notreach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplugand store the cord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts. If you donot, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heaterplugged in? The answer depends on the outsidetemperature, the kind of oil you have, and someother things. Instead of trying to list everything here,we ask that you contact your dealer in the areawhere you will be parking your vehicle. The dealercan give you the best advice for that particular area.

118

Automatic Transaxle OperationThe shift lever is located on the center console.When you change gears, the different shift positionswill display on the instrument panel cluster.

There are several different positions for theautomatic transaxle.

PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels.It is the best position to use when you start yourengine because your vehicle cannot move easily.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set. Yourvehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will notmove, even when you are on fairly levelground, always set your parking brakeand move the shift lever to PARK (P). SeeShifting Into Park (P) on page 123. If youare pulling a trailer, see Towing a Traileron page 328.

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)before starting the engine. Your vehicle has anautomatic transaxle shift lock control system.

119

You must fully apply your regular brakes first andthen press the shift lever button before youcan shift from PARK (P) when the ignition key is inRUN. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), easepressure on the shift lever and push the shift leverall the way into PARK (P) as you maintainbrake application. Then press the shift lever buttonand move the shift lever into another gear. SeeShifting Out of Park (P) on page 125.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damagethe transaxle. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Shift toREVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out ofsnow, ice, or sand without damaging yourtransaxle, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 320.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whenyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle isbeing towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while yourengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly onthe brake pedal, your vehicle could movevery rapidly. You could lose control andhit people or objects. Do not shift into adrive gear while your engine is running athigh speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) while the engine is running athigh speed may damage the transaxle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Be sure the engine is not running athigh speeds when shifting your vehicle.

Notice: Shifting to a drive gear fromNEUTRAL (N) while the vehicle is movingcould damage the transaxle. Make sure thevehicle is stopped before shifting fromNEUTRAL (N) into a drive gear.

120

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving withthe automatic transaxle. It provides the best fueleconomy for your vehicle. If you need more powerfor passing, and you are:

• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), pushyour accelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h), pushyour accelerator all the way down.

Downshifting the transaxle in slippery roadconditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding”under Loss of Control on page 305.

INTERMEDIATE (I): This position is also used fornormal driving. However, it reduces vehicle speedwithout using your brakes for slight downgradeswhere the vehicle would otherwise accelerate dueto steepness of grade. If constant upshifting ordownshifting occurs while driving up steep hills, thisposition can be used to prevent repetitive types ofshifts. You might choose INTERMEDIATE (I)instead of DRIVE (D) when driving on hilly, windingroads and when towing a trailer, so that there is lessshifting between gears.

LOW (L): This position reduces vehicle speedmore than INTERMEDIATE (I) without actuallyusing your brakes. You can use it on very steephills, or in deep snow or mud. If the shift leveris put in LOW (L), the transaxle will not shift intoLOW (L) until the vehicle is going slowly enough.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damage the transaxle.If you are stuck, do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakes to hold thevehicle in place.

121

Transaxle OverheatingIf the transaxle fluid temperature rises above284°F (140°C) or rises rapidly, the Engine CoolantTemperature Warning Light will flash. SeeEngine Coolant Temperature Warning Light onpage 182 for more information. When the transaxleoverheats it will go into a protection mode andwill default shift into fifth gear if in the DRIVE (D)position, or second gear if in the LOW (L)position. Continue driving the vehicle in eitherposition depending on the required vehicle speedand load. Once the fluid temperature lowers tothe normal temperature range, the transaxlewill return to the normal shift patterns. Towing ordriving on long hills can cause the transaxlefluid temperature to be higher than normal. If thetransaxle fluid temperature will not cool, youmay need to pull over and check the transaxlefluid level. You should also check the enginecoolant temperature. If it is hot, see EngineOverheating on page 360.

Parking Brake

The parking brake lever is located to the right ofthe driver’s seat.

To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedaldown and pull up on the parking brake lever. If theignition is on, the brake system warning light willcome on.

To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedaldown. Pull the parking brake lever up until you canpress the release button. Hold the release button inas you move the brake lever all the way down.

122

Make sure to release the parking brake beforedriving the vehicle.

If the parking brake is applied and the vehicle ismoving at least 4 mph (6 km/h), a chime willactivate to remind you to release the parking brake.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and cause prematurewear or damage to brake system parts. Verifythat the parking brake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off before driving.

Shifting Into Park (P)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.



Your vehicle can roll. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,use the steps that follow. If you arepulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 328.

1. Hold the brake pedal down and set theparking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into the PARK (P)position by holding in the button on theshift lever and pushing it all the way towardthe front of the vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you

can leave your vehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

123

Leaving Your Vehicle With theEngine Running

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehiclecould move suddenly if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the parkingbrake firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. You orothers could be injured. Do not leave yourvehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)and your parking brake is firmly set before youleave it. After you have moved the shift lever intoPARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.Then, see if you can move the shift leveraway from PARK (P) without first pushing thebutton. If you can, it means that the shift lever wasnot fully locked into PARK (P).

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you do not shiftyour transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weightof the vehicle may put too much force on theparking pawl in the transaxle. You may findit difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).This is called “torque lock.” To prevent torque lock,set the parking brake and then shift into PARK (P)properly before you leave the driver’s seat. Tofind out how, see Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 123.

When you are ready to drive, move the shift leverout of PARK (P) before you release the parkingbrake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to haveanother vehicle push yours a little uphill totake some of the pressure from the parking pawlin the transaxle, so you can pull the shift leverout of PARK (P).

124

Shifting Out of Park (P)Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lockcontrol system. You have to fully apply yourregular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)when the ignition is in RUN.

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressureon the shift lever — push the shift lever all theway into PARK (P), as you maintain brakeapplication. Then, press the button on the shiftlever and move the shift lever into the gearyou wish.

If you ever hold the brake pedal down but stillcannot shift out of PARK (P), try this:

1. Turn the key to LOCK.

2. Apply and hold the brake until the end ofStep 4.

3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).

4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the desireddrive gear.

5. Have your vehicle fixed as soon as you can.

125

Parking Over Things That Burn{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.

126

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• Your exhaust system sounds strange

or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a

collision.



• Your vehicle was damaged whendriving over high points on the roador over road debris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or exhaust system has

been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

127

Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But ifyou ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 127.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan is atthe highest setting. One place this canhappen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER park ina garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 316.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leaveyour vehicle when the engine is runningunless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,always set your parking brake and movethe shift lever to PARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewill not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 123.

If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling atrailer, also see Towing a Trailer on page 328.

128

Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorTo adjust the angle of the mirror, move the mirror toa position that allows you see to out of the backwindow. To adjust the height of the mirror, adjustthe arm that connects the mirror to the windshield.

To reduce glare from lights behind you, move thelever toward you to the night position.

Manual Rearview Mirror withOnStar®

To adjust the angle of the mirror, move the mirror toa position that allows you see to out of the backwindow. To adjust the height of the mirror, adjustthe arm that connects the mirror to the windshield.

To reduce glare from lights behind you, move thelever toward you to the night position.There are also OnStar® buttons located at thebottom of the mirror face. See your dealer for moreinformation on the system and how to subscribeto OnStar®. See OnStar® System on page 133 formore information about the services OnStar®

provides.

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar® and CompassIf your vehicle has this feature, an automaticdimming mirror automatically dims to the properlevel to minimize glare at night from lightsbehind your vehicle. For more information aboutOnStar®, see OnStar® System on page 133.

The mirror includes a display in the upper rightcorner of the mirror face that shows the compassreading.

O (On/Off): Press this button to operate theautomatic dimming and compass features.

Automatic Dimming Mirror OperationThe automatic dimming mirror function is turned oneach time the ignition is started. A light near theon/off button will come on to indicate the automaticdimming is on.

Press and hold the on/off button for aboutfour seconds to manually turn the automaticdimming function on or off.

129

Compass OperationPress the on/off button once briefly to turn thecompass on or off.

Compass DisplayIf the display reads CAL, the compass needs tobe calibrated. For more information, see “CompassCalibration” later in this section.

Compass VarianceCompass variance is the difference betweenearth’s magnetic north and true geographic north.If not adjusted to account for compass variance,the mirror’s compass could give false readings.The mirror is set in zone eight upon leavingthe factory. It will be necessary to adjust thecompass to compensate for compass variance ifyou live outside of zone eight. Under certaincircumstances, as during a long distancecross-country trip, it will also be necessary toadjust for compass variance.

To adjust for compass variance, do the following:

1. Find your current location and variancezone number on the following zone map.

2. Press the on/off button approximatelyseven seconds until the word ZONE appears inthe display. The compass is now in zone mode.

3. Press and release the on/off button until thedesired zone number appears in the display.After approximately four seconds ofinactivity, the new zone number will be lockedin and the compass display will return.

4. Calibrate the compass as described below.

130

Compass CalibrationThe compass may need calibration if one of thefollowing occurs:

• After approximately five seconds, the displaydoes not show a compass heading (N forNorth, for example), there may be a strongmagnetic field interfering with the compass.Such interference may be caused by amagnetic antenna mount, magnetic note padholder, or a similar magnetic item.

• The compass does not display the correctheading and the compass zone varianceis set correctly.

In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in themirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed,push the on/off button for approximately12 seconds or until CAL is displayed.

The compass can be calibrated by driving thevehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until thedisplay reads a direction.

Cleaning the MirrorWhen cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel orsimilar material dampened with glass cleaner.Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirroras that may cause the liquid cleaner to enterthe mirror housing.

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith CompassIf the vehicle has this feature, the automaticdimming mirror automatically dims to the properlevel to minimize glare at night from lightsbehind your vehicle.

The mirror also has a display in the upper rightcorner of the mirror that shows the compassreading.

O On/Off: Press this button to operate theautomatic dimming and compass features.

131

Automatic Dimming Mirror OperationSee Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror withOnStar® and Compass on page 129 for informationon Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation andCompass Operation.

Outside Power Mirrors

The controls for thepower mirrors arelocated on theinstrument panel.

To adjust the mirrors, do the following:

1. Move the selector switch to the left or right tochoose the driver’s or passenger’s mirror.

2. Press the corresponding edges of the roundcontrol pad to move each mirror to thedesired direction.

Adjust each outside mirror so that you can see alittle of your vehicle, and the area behind yourvehicle.

Both mirrors can manually be folded by pullingthem toward the vehicle. This feature maybe useful when going through a car wash or aconfined space. Push the mirrors away from thevehicle, to the normal position, before driving.

132

Outside Convex MirrorsThe passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convexmirror’s surface is curved, creating a widerarea of vision for the driver.

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (likeother vehicles) look farther away thanthey really are. If you cut too sharply intothe right lane, you could hit a vehicle onyour right. Check your inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

OnStar® System

OnStar® uses several innovative technologies andlive advisors to provide you with a wide rangeof safety, security, information, and convenienceservices. If your airbags deploy, the system isdesigned to make an automatic call to OnStar®

Emergency advisors who can request emergencyservices be sent to your location. If you lockyour keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal tounlock your doors. If you need roadsideassistance, press the OnStar® button and theycan contact Roadside Service for you.

133

OnStar® service is provided to you subject to theOnStar® Terms and Conditions. You may cancelyour OnStar® service at any time by contactingOnStar® as provided below. A complete OnStar®

Owners Guide and the OnStar® Terms andConditions are included in the vehicle’s OnStar®

Subscriber glove box literature. For moreinformation, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contactOnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) orTTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar® buttonto speak with an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day,7 days a week.

Not all OnStar® features are available on allvehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped toprovide the services described below, or for afull description of OnStar® services and systemlimitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in yourglove box or visit onstar.com.

OnStar® ServicesFor new vehicles with OnStar®, the Safe & SoundPlan, or the Directions & Connections® Plan isincluded for one year from the date of purchase.You can extend this plan beyond the first year,or upgrade to the Directions & Connections® Plan.For more information, press the OnStar® buttonto speak with an advisor. Some OnStar® services(such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen VehicleLocation Assistance) may not be availableuntil you register with OnStar®.

134

Available Services with Safe & Sound® Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)(If equipped)

• Link to Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics

• GM® Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics

• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with30 complimentary minutes

• OnStar® Virtual Advisor ( U.S. Only)

Available Services included withDirections & Connections® Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered orOnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

OnStar® Hands-Free CallingOnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligibleOnStar® subscribers to make and receive callsusing voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fullyintegrated into the vehicle, and can be usedwith OnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages.Hands-Free Calling may also be linked to aVerizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a BellMobility service plan in Canada, depending oneligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar®

Owners Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visitwww.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak withan OnStar® advisor by pressing the OnStar®

button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

OnStar® Virtual AdvisorOnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes toaccess location-based weather, local traffic reports,and stock quotes. By pressing the phone buttonand giving a few simple voice commands, you canbrowse through the various topics. See the OnStar®

Owners Guide for more information (Only availablein the continental U.S.).

135

OnStar® Steering Wheel ControlsYour vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button thatcan be used to interact with OnStar® Hands-FreeCalling. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 285 for more information.

On some vehicles, you may have to hold thebutton for a few seconds and give the command“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling feature.

On some vehicles, the mute button can be used todial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dialphone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’sGuide for more information.

How OnStar® Service WorksIn order to provide you with OnStar® services,your vehicle’s OnStar® system has the capabilityof recording and transmitting vehicle information.This information is automatically sent to anOnStar® Call Center at the time of an OnStar®

button press, Emergency button press or ifyour airbags or AACN system deploys. The vehicleinformation usually includes your GPS locationand, in the event of a crash, additional informationregarding the accident that your vehicle hasbeen involved in (e.g. the direction from whichyour vehicle was hit). When you use the VirtualAdvisor feature of OnStar® Hands-Free Calling,your vehicle also sends OnStar® your GPSlocation so that we can provide you withlocation-based services.

136

OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicleis in a place where OnStar® has an agreementwith a wireless service provider for service in thatarea. OnStar® service also cannot work unlessyou are in a place where the wireless serviceprovider OnStar® has hired for that areahas coverage, network capacity and receptionwhen the service is needed, and technology thatis compatible with the OnStar® service. Not allservices are available everywhere, particularly inremote or enclosed areas, or at all times.

OnStar® service that involves location informationabout your vehicle cannot work unless GPSsatellite signals are unobstructed and available inthat place as well.

Your vehicle must have a working electricalsystem (including adequate battery power) for theOnStar® equipment to operate. There are otherproblems OnStar® cannot control that may preventOnStar® from providing OnStar® service to youat any particular time or place. Some examples aredamage to important parts of your vehicle in anaccident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weatheror wireless phone network congestion.

Your ResponsibilityYou may need to increase the volume of yourradio to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light nextto the OnStar® buttons is red, this means thatyour system is not functioning properly and shouldbe checked by a dealer. If the light appearsclear (no light is appearing), your OnStar®

subscription has expired. You can always pressthe OnStar® button to confirm that your OnStar®

equipment is active.

Storage Areas

Glove BoxTo open the glove box, pull the handle to the leftand pull the glove box door down until it stopsand is fully open.

Cupholder(s)There are cupholders located at the front and rearof the center console. To access, pull tray out.There is also a cupholder located behind the shiftlever.

137

Center Console Storage AreaYour vehicle has a center console armrest withstorage area. Use the lever on the front ofthe console to open it.

Luggage Carrier

{CAUTION:

If you try to carry something on top ofyour vehicle that is longer or wider thanthe luggage carrier — like paneling,plywood, a mattress and so forth — thewind can catch it as you drive along. Thiscan cause you to lose control. What youare carrying could be violently torn off,and this could cause you or other driversto have a collision, and of course damageyour vehicle. You may be able to carrysomething like this inside. But, nevercarry something longer or wider than theluggage carrier on top of your vehicle.

A luggage carrier allows you to load things on topof your vehicle. The luggage carrier has siderails attached to the roof, sliding crossrails, if thevehicle has them, and places to use for tyingthings down. These let you load some things ontop of your vehicle, as long as they are notwider or longer than the luggage carrier.

The roof rack crossrails lock in five positions alongthe straight section of the side rail.

138

Press the levers down until the lockingmechanisms fully engage to the side rail. Makesure each lever is in the down position. Thecrossrail will not slide when properly engaged.

To move the crossrail, pull up on the end levers oneach side of the crossrail to the upright position.This will release the locking mechanism fromthe siderail. Lift and place the crossrail into thenew position. Press the levers down until thelocking mechanisms fully engage to the side rail.Make sure each lever is in the down position.The crossrail will not slide when properly engaged.

Notice: Loading cargo on the luggagecarrier that weighs more than 150 lbs (68 kg)or hangs over the rear or sides of the vehiclemay damage your vehicle. When loadingcargo, tie it to the crossrail and against thesiderail. Lock the crossrails to the far forwardand backward location to make sure theload is evenly distributed on the luggagecarrier.

Do not stand on the plastic lower body panelwhen loading cargo on the luggage carrier.

Loading cargo on the luggage carrier will makethe center of vehicle gravity higher. Avoidhigh speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, suddenbraking or abrupt maneuvers. This could resultin loss of control of the vehicle.

Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacitywhen loading your vehicle. For more informationon vehicle capacity and loading, see Loading YourVehicle on page 321

To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you aredriving, check now and then to make surethe luggage carrier crossrails are locked andcargo is still securely fastened.

When the luggage carrier is not in use, store thecrossrail inside the vehicle. If not possible,lock one crossrail at the rear most position on thesiderails and lock the other crossrail above theopening of the rear door to reduce wind noise.

139

Rear Compartment StoragePanel/CoverYour vehicle may have an adjustable panel/cargocover feature. The panel/cargo cover can beadjusted into three positions.

There is a flip panel towards the front of the cargocover. You may have to flip this panel upwardin order to gain access to the cargo cover.

To use the panel in the lower position, do thefollowing:

1. Insert the front corners of the panel into thelower guides.

2. Slide the panel forward.

3. Press down on the back of the panel to lock itin place.

The panel can be used in this position if you needadditional space above the panel. Place thecargo on top of the panel in this position.

140

{CAUTION:

If you were to carry things on theadjustable panel when it is in the upper(cargo cover) or center positions, during asudden vehicle movement or a crash,those things could be thrown around inthe vehicle. You or others could beinjured. When it is in the upper or centerposition, always secure any cargo on thefloor beneath the panel/cover.

To use the panel in the center position, do thefollowing:

1. Insert the front corners of the panel into themiddle guides.


3. Press down and pull rearward on the back ofthe panel to lock it in place.

The panel can be used in this position when youhave to place a flat or spare tire in the rearcargo area.

To use the panel in the upper position, do thefollowing:

1. Insert the front corners of the panel into thetop guides.


3. Press down and pull rearward on the back ofthe panel to lock it in place.

This can be used as a cargo cover for the reararea. The panel may be installed either carpet orplastic side up. The panel may also be usedas a table in this position. See Table on page 142for more information.

Rear Seat ArmrestYour vehicle may have a rear seat armrest thatcontains two cupholders. To access thecupholders, pull the armrest down from the rearseatback.

141

Table

Your vehicle may have an adjustable panel thatalso functions as a table. The maximum loadfor the table is 100 lbs. distributed (45 kg).

To set up the table, do the following:

1. With the adjustable panel in the upperposition, pull it rearward to position it for useas a table. The plastic side should be up.

2. Turn the knob to release the leg from theplastic side of the table and turn the legoutward.

3. Set the table leg onto the liftgate lock strikerat the rear edge of the vehicle.

Make sure to place the table leg securely onto theliftgate lock striker.

Notice: Driving with the panel extended intothe table position could damage your vehicle.Always have the panel in the stored positionwhile you are driving.

Notice: Placing hot items on the surface ofthe table could damage it. Always be sure thatthe items that are placed on the surface ofthe table are of moderate temperature.

There are four hooks located on the table that canbe used for grocery bags.

142

Convenience NetYour vehicle may have a rear compartment net toprevent items from rolling under the rear seat.There may also be four convenience net tie-downs.Two tie-downs are located on the side trim justbehind the rear seat and the other two are locatedon the floor at the rear of the cargo area.

SunroofIf the vehicle is equipped with a sunroof, thecontrols to operate it are located on the headlinerabove the rearview mirror. The ignition mustbe in RUN or ACC, or Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) must be active, to operate thesunroof. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) onpage 116 for more information.

To express-open thesunroof glass panel andsunshade, press theswitch rearwardand release it.

To stop the sunroof before it is completely open,press the switch rearward again. The sunshadecannot be closed with the sunroof open.

To close the sunroof, press forward and hold theswitch until the sunroof stops, lifts and sealsat the back of the sunroof glass. Press forward onthe switch again, to make sure the sunroof isfully closed

To put the sunroof in the vent position, pull downon the front of the switch. Push up on the frontof the switch to close it.

143

✍ NOTES

144

Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 148Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 150Other Warning Devices ............................. 150Horn .......................................................... 150Tilt Wheel .................................................. 151Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 151Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 152Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 152Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 153Windshield Wipers ..................................... 153Windshield Washer .................................... 154Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...................... 155Cruise Control ........................................... 155Headlamps ................................................ 159Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 159Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 160Automatic Headlamp System ..................... 160Fog Lamps ................................................ 161Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 161Dome Lamp .............................................. 162Entry Lighting ............................................ 162Map Lamps ............................................... 162Cargo Lamp .............................................. 162Electric Power Management ...................... 163

Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 164Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 164Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ................ 165

Climate Controls ......................................... 166Climate Control System ............................. 166Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 170Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............. 170

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 172Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 173Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 174Trip Odometer ........................................... 174Tachometer ............................................... 174Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 175Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 175Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 176Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 177Battery Warning Light ................................ 179Brake System Warning Light ..................... 180Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 181Traction Control System (TCS)

Warning Light ........................................ 182Engine Coolant Temperature

Warning Light ........................................ 182

Section 3 Instrument Panel

145

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 183Tire Pressure Light .................................... 183Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 184Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 187Change Engine Oil Light ........................... 188Security Light ............................................ 189Fog Lamp Light ......................................... 189Cruise Control Light .................................. 189Reduced Engine Power Light .................... 190Highbeam On Light ................................... 190Service All-Wheel Drive Light .................... 191All-Wheel Drive Disabled Light .................. 191Gate Ajar Light .......................................... 192Door Ajar Light .......................................... 192Service Vehicle Soon Light ........................ 192Fuel Gage ................................................. 192Low Fuel Warning Light ............................ 193

Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 194DIC Operation and Displays ...................... 195DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 200DIC Vehicle Personalization ....................... 210

Audio System(s) ......................................... 218Setting the Time (Without Date Display) .... 220Setting the Time (With Date Display) ......... 220Radio with CD (Base) ............................... 222Radio with CD (MP3) ................................ 228Radio with CD and DVD ........................... 239Using an MP3 (Radio with CD or Six-Disc

CD Player) ............................................. 257Using an MP3 (Radio with CD and DVD

Player) ................................................... 264XM Radio Messages ................................. 272Navigation/Radio System ........................... 274Rear Seat Entertainment System ............... 274Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 285Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 285Radio Reception ........................................ 287Care of Your CDs and DVDs .................... 288Care of the CD and DVD Player ............... 288Multi-Band Antenna ................................... 288

Section 3 Instrument Panel

146

✍ NOTES

147

Instrument Panel Overview

148

The main components of your instrument panel are the following:

A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 170.B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn

Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 151.C. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel

Cluster on page 173.D. Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever. See

Windshield Wipers on page 153.E. Driver Information Center Controls. See DIC

Operation and Displays on page 195.F. Hazard Warning Flashers. See Hazard Warning

Flashers on page 150.G. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator. See

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 177.H. Rear Window Wiper/Washer Buttons. See

Rear Window Wiper/Washer on page 155. FogLamps Button. See Fog Lamps on page 161.

I. Power Mirror Control. See Outside PowerMirrors on page 132.

J. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. SeeInstrument Panel Brightness on page 161.

K. Cruise Controls. See Cruise Control onpage 155.

L. Tilt Wheel. See Tilt Wheel on page 151.M. Horn. See Horn on page 150.N. Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio

Steering Wheel Controls on page 285.O. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on

page 218.P. Shift Lever. See Shifting Into Park (P) on

page 123.Q. Traction Control System (TCS) Button. See

Traction Control System (TCS) on page 297.R. Power Window Switches. See Power Windows

on page 110.S. Climate Control System. See Climate Control

System on page 166. Heated Seat Buttons(If Equipped). See Heated Seats on page 11.

T. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 137.

149

Hazard Warning FlashersYour hazard warning flashers let you warn others.They also let police know you have a problem.Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash onand off.

The hazard warningflasher button is locatedin the center of theinstrument panel.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition your key is in, and even if the key isnot in the ignition switch.

Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, yourturn signals will not work.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set them upat the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)behind your vehicle.

HornPress near or on the horn symbols on yoursteering wheel pad to sound the horn.

150

Tilt WheelYour vehicle has a tilt wheel that allows you toadjust the steering wheel.

The lever to tilt the steering wheel is located onthe left side of the steering column.

To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pushthe lever down. Then, move the steering wheelto a comfortable position and pull the leverup firmly to lock the column in place.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:

• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. SeeTurn and Lane-Change Signals on page 152.

• 23 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 152.

• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 153.

• O Exterior Lamp Control. See Headlamps onpage 159.

151

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsThe turn signal has two upward (for right) andtwo downward (for left) positions. These positionsallow you to signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up ordown. When the turn is finished, the lever willreturn automatically.

An arrow on theinstrument panel clusterwill flash in thedirection of the turn orlane change.

To signal a lane change, raise or lower the leveruntil the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until youcomplete the lane change. The lever will returnby itself when you release it.

As you signal a turn or a lane change, if thearrows flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burnedout and other drivers won’t see your turn signal.

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid anaccident. If the arrows do not go on at all when yousignal a turn, check the fuse, see Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 431 and for burned-out bulbs.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from low beam tohigh, push the turn signal lever away from you. Tochange from high beam to low beam, pull theturn signal lever towards you. To flash thehigh beams from low beam, pull the turn signallever all the way towards you. Then release it.

When the high beamsare on, this light on theinstrument panelcluster will also be on.

152

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use your high-beamheadlamps to signal a driver in front of you thatyou want to pass.

To flash the high beams from low beam, pull theturn signal/multifunction lever all the waytowards you. Then release it.

Windshield WipersBe sure to clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If the wiper blades arefrozen to the windshield, gently loosen or thawthem. If the blades do become damaged,install new blades or blade inserts. See WindshieldWiper Blade Replacement on page 384.

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.A circuit breaker will stop the motor until itcools down. Clear away snow or ice to preventan overload.

Use the lever on the right side of the steeringcolumn to operate the windshield wipers.

1 (High Speed): Move the lever to this positionfor steady wiping at high speed.

6 (Low Speed): Move the lever to thisposition for steady wiping at low speed.

153

& (Delay): Move the lever to this position to seta delay between wipes.

6 (Delay Adjustment): Move the lever to thedelay position to choose a delayed wiping cycle.Turn the intermittent adjust band down for a longerdelay or up for a shorter delay.

9 (Off): Move the lever to this position to turn offthe windshield wipers.

8 (Mist): Move the lever all the way down tomist and release for a single wiping cycle.The windshield wipers will stop after one wipe andthen return to the original position. If morewipes are needed, hold the lever on mist longer.

Windshield Washer

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

There is a button marked with the windshieldwasher symbol at the end of the windshield wiperlever. Press this button to spray washer fluidon the windshield. The wipers will run for a fewcycles to clear the window and then either stop orreturn to your preset speed. For more washcycles, press and hold the button longer.

154

Rear Window Wiper/WasherThe rear wiper and rear wash buttons are locatedon the instrument panel above the audio system.

Z (Rear Wiper): Press this button to turnthe rear wiper on and off. When the wiper is on itwill run continuously at a preset speed.

Y (Wash): Press this button to spray washerfluid on the rear window. The window wiperwill also come on. Release the button whenenough fluid has been sprayed on the window.The rear wiper will run a few more cycles after it isreleased. If the rear wiper function was alreadyon, prior to pressing the wash button, it will stay onuntil the wiper button is pressed again.

The rear window washer uses the same fluid thatis in the windshield washer reservoir. SeeWindshield Washer Fluid on page 368.

Cruise ControlWith cruise control, you can maintain a speed ofabout 25 mph (40 km/h) or more withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator. This canreally help on long trips. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.

155

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you do notwant to. You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruise control switchoff until you want to use cruise control.

The cruise controlbuttons are located onthe left side of thesteering wheel.

J (On/Off): Press this button to turn the cruisecontrol system on and off. The indicator lightis on when cruise control is on and turns off whencruise control is off.

+RES (Resume): Press this button to resume aset speed and to accelerate the speed.

SET− (Set): Press this button to set a speed andto decrease the speed.

[ (Cancel): Press this button to cancel cruisecontrol without erasing the set speed from memory.

156

Setting Cruise ControlThe cruise control light on the instrument panelcluster will come on after the cruise controlhas been set to the desired speed.

1. Press the on/off button to turn cruise control on.

2. Get up to the speed you want.

3. Press the SET− button and release it.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

When the brakes are applied, the cruise controlshuts off.

If the vehicle is in cruise control and the TractionControl System (TCS) begins to limit wheelspin, the cruise control will automaticallydisengage. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 297. When road conditions allow, thecruise control can be used again.

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set your cruise control at a desiredspeed and then you apply the brakes. Thisshuts off the cruise control. The cruise symbol inthe instrument panel cluster will also go offindicating cruise is no longer engaged. To returnto your previously set speed, you do not needto go through the set process again.

Once you are driving about 25 mph (40 km/h) ormore, press the +RES button on your steeringwheel. The vehicle will go back to the previous setspeed and stay there.

157

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise ControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed.

• Press and hold the +RES button on thesteering wheel until you reach your newdesired speed, then release it.

• To increase vehicle speed in small amounts,press the +RES button. Each time you dothis, you will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControlTo reduce your speed while using cruise control:

• Press and hold the SET– button on thesteering wheel until the desired lower speed isreached, then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, push theSET− button on the steering wheel briefly.Each time you do this, the vehicle will go about1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehiclewill slow down to the cruise control speed you setearlier. However, if you use the accelerator toincrease the vehicle’s speed for approximately60 seconds, cruise control will disengage.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well your cruise control will work on hillsdepends upon your speed, load, and thesteepness of the hills. When going up steep hills,you may have to step on the accelerator pedalto maintain your vehicle’s speed. When goingdownhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lowergear to limit the vehicle’s speed. Of course,applying the brakes ends cruise control. Manydrivers find this to be too much trouble and do notuse cruise control on steep hills.

158

Ending Cruise ControlThere are three ways to end cruise control:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal.

• Press the cancel button on the steering wheel.

• Press the On/Off button on the steeringwheel.

Erasing Speed MemoryWhen the cruise control or the ignition is turnedoff, the cruise control set speed memory is erased.

HeadlampsThe exterior lamp control is located on the turnsignal/multifunction lever.

O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the controlwith this symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.

The exterior lamp control has the followingpositions:

AUTO (Off/Automatic Headlamps): Turn thecontrol to this position to put the headlampsin automatic mode. Automatic mode will turn theexterior lamps on and off depending uponhow much light is available outside of the vehicle.

; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to thisposition to turn on the parking lamps together withthe following:

• Sidemarker Lamps

• Taillamps

• License Plate Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

53 (Headlamps): Turning the control to thisposition turns on the headlamps, together with thepreviously listed lamps and lights.

Headlamps on ReminderIf you open the driver’s door with the ignition offand the lamps on, you will hear a warning chime.

159

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easierfor others to see the front of your vehicle during theday. DRL can be helpful in many different drivingconditions, but they can be especially helpful in theshort periods after dawn and before sunset. Fullyfunctional Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) arerequired on all vehicles first sold in Canada.

The DRL system will make your low-beamheadlamps come on at a reduced brightness indaylight when the following conditions are met:

• The ignition is on.

• The exterior lamp band is in the automaticposition.

• The transaxle is not in PARK (P).

• The light sensor determines it is daytime.

• The parking brake is released.

When the DRL are on, the low-beam headlampswill be on at a reduced brightness. The taillamps,sidemarker and other lamps will not be on.The instrument panel will not be lit up either.

When you turn the exterior lamp band to theheadlamp position, your low-beam headlamps willcome on. The other lamps that come on withyour headlamps will also come on.

When you turn off the headlamps, the regularlamps will go off, and your low-beam headlampswill come on to the reduced brightness.

To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, move theshift lever to PARK (P). The DRL will stay off untilyou move the shift lever out of PARK (P).

As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regularheadlamp system when you need it.

Automatic Headlamp SystemWhen it is dark enough outside and the exteriorlamps control is in the automatic position, theheadlamps will come on automatically. SeeHeadlamps on page 159.

Your vehicle has a light sensor located on top ofthe instrument panel. Make sure it is not covered,or the headlamps will be on when you do notneed them.

The system may also turn on the headlamps whendriving through a parking garage or tunnel.

160

Fog LampsUse the fog lamps for better visibility in foggy ormisty conditions.

The fog lamps button islocated on the centerconsole above the radio.

To use the fog lamps, the parking lamps orlow-beam headlamps must be on.

Push the button to turn the fog lamps on or off.

The fog lamp button will be lit when the lamps areon. The Fog lamps will go off whenever youturn the high-beam headlamps on. When thehigh-beam headlamps are turned off, the fog lampswill come on again.

Some localities have laws that require theheadlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

Instrument Panel BrightnessThis feature controls the brightness of theinstrument panel lights.

The control for thisfeature is located on theinstrument panel tothe left of the steeringcolumn.

Turn the control up to brighten the lights or downto dim them.

161

Dome LampThe dome lamp switch has three positions.

9 (Off): The lamp will not come on as long asthe switch is in this position.

AUTO (Automatic): The lamp will come on when adoor is opened. See Entry Lighting on page 162.

R (On): The lamp will stay on as long as theswitch is in this position.

Entry LightingIf the dome lamp is in the AUTO position, thedome lamp and the cargo lamp inside your vehiclewill come on when any door is opened. Inaddition, the light will come on when the remotekeyless entry unlock button is pressed. It willstay on for 20 seconds or until a door is opened.After the door is opened the light will remainon and stay on for 20 seconds after the doors areclosed, or until you put the key in the ignitionand turn the key to RUN.

Map Lamps

Your vehicle may have lamps located on theheadliner above the rearview mirror. Push on thelens in the lamp to turn them on and off.

Cargo LampThe cargo lamp is located over the rearcompartment, and is controlled by the dome lamp.See Dome Lamp on page 162.

162

Electric Power ManagementThe vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM)that estimates the battery’s temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltage for bestperformance and extended life of the battery.

When the battery’s state of charge is low, thevoltage is raised slightly to quickly put the chargeback in. When the state of charge is high, thevoltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging.If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage or voltagedisplay on the Driver Information Center (DIC), youmay see the voltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, an alert will bedisplayed.

The battery can be discharged at idle if theelectrical loads are very high. This is true for allvehicles. This is because the generator (alternator)may not be spinning fast enough at idle toproduce all the power that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs when several of thefollowing loads are on: headlamps, high beams,fog lamps, rear window defogger, climatecontrol fan at high speed, heated seats, enginecooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of thebattery. It does this by balancing the generator’soutput and the vehicle’s electrical needs. Itcan increase engine idle speed to generate morepower, whenever needed. It can temporarilyreduce the power demands of some accessories.

Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels,without being noticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action, this action maybe noticeable to the driver. If so, a DriverInformation Center (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as Battery Saver Active or ServiceBattery Charging System. If this message isdisplayed, it is recommended that the driverreduce the electrical loads as much as possible.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 200.

163

Battery Run-Down ProtectionYour vehicle has a battery saver feature designedto protect the vehicle’s battery.

When any interior lamp is left on and the ignitionis turned off, the battery rundown protectionsystem will automatically turn the lamp off after20 minutes. This will avoid draining the battery.This vehicle also has a retained accessory powerfeature. If the radio is on, it will turn off after10 minutes or if any door on the vehicle is opened.See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) onpage 116.

Accessory Power Outlet(s)The accessory power outlets can be used toconnect electrical equipment such as a cellularphone or CB radio.

The accessory power outlets located in front of thecenter console storage area, at the rear of thecenter console, and the vehicle may haveone located in the rear cargo area.

To use the outlets, remove the cover. When not inuse, always cover the outlet with the protective cap.

Notice: If electrical devices are left pluggedinto a power outlet, the battery may draincausing your vehicle not to start or damage tothe battery. This would not be covered bythe warranty. Always unplug all electricaldevices when turning off your vehicle.

Certain electrical accessories may not becompatible with the accessory power outlets andcould result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.If you experience a problem, see your dealer foradditional information on the accessory poweroutlet.

164

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not use equipment exceedingmaximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.Check with your dealer before adding electricalequipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure tofollow the installation instructions included with theequipment.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your warranty.Do not hang any type of accessory oraccessory bracket from the plug because thepower outlets are designed for accessorypower plugs only.

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette LighterYour vehicle may have a removable ashtray andcigarette lighter. The ashtray can be placedinto the front console cupholders.

To use the lighter, push it in all the way and letgo. When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in whileit is heating will not allow the lighter toback away from the heating element when it ishot. Damage from overheating may occur tothe lighter or heating element, or a fuse couldbe blown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter inwhile it is heating. Do not use equipmentexceeding maximum amperage rating of15 amperes.

Notice: If you put papers, pins, or otherflammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettesor other smoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage your vehicle. Neverput flammable items in the ashtray.

165

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemWith this system you can control the heating,cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle.

Operation

Temperature Control: Turn the center knobclockwise or counterclockwise to increaseor decrease the temperature inside the vehicle.

9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease the fanspeed. In any setting other than off, the fanwill run continuously with the ignition on. To turnoff the air completely, turn the fan to 0 andselect the recirculation button.

Use the right knob to select from the followingmodes:

There is one position between each mode to finelyadjust airflow position.

166

H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs about half of theair to the instrument panel outlets, and thendirects the remaining air to the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air tothe floor outlets with some air directed to thewindshield and side windows.

The right knob may also be used to select thedefrost and defog modes that are described in thissection.

You can also select modes by using the followingbuttons:

; (Outside Air): Press this button to turn theoutside air mode on. When this mode is on,outside air will circulate throughout the vehicle.When the button is pressed, an indicator lightin the button will come on to let you know that it isactivated. The outside air mode can be usedwith all modes, but it cannot be used withthe recirculation mode.

@ (Recirculation): Press this button on thecenter knob to recirculate cabin air throughthe vehicle. It can be used to prevent outside airand odors from entering the vehicle or to help heator cool the air inside the vehicle more quickly.An indicator light above the symbol will come onin this mode. Operation in this mode during periodsof high humidity and cool outside temperaturesmay result in increased window fogging. If windowfogging is experienced, select the defrost mode.

# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turnthe air conditioning system on or off. When thisbutton is pressed, an indicator light on the buttonwill come on to let you know the air conditioning isactivated. The air conditioning can be selected inany mode as long as the fan switch is on.

On hot days, open the windows to let hot insideair escape; then close them. This helps to reducethe time it takes for the vehicle to cool down. Italso helps the system to operate more efficiently.

167

For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:

1. Select the vent mode.

2. Select the outside air.

3. Select air conditioning.

4. Select the coolest temperature.

5. Select the highest fan speed.

6. Once the vehicle’s interior temperature isbelow the outside temperature, selectrecirculation mode for enhanced cooling.

Using these settings together for long periods oftime may cause the air inside of the vehicleto become too dry. To prevent this fromhappening, after the air inside of the vehicle hascooled, turn the recirculation mode off.

The air conditioning system removes moisturefrom the air, so you may sometimes notice a smallamount of water dripping underneath the vehiclewhile idling or after turning off the engine. Thisis normal.

( (Heated Seats): If your vehicle has heatedseats, see Heated Seats on page 11.

Defogging and DefrostingFog or frost on the inside of windows is a result ofhigh humidity (moisture) condensing on the coolwindow glass. This can be minimized if the climatecontrol system is used properly. To avoid foggingwindows on rainy and humid days at temperaturesabove freezing, turn on the air conditioningsystem. Also, it is best to avoid the use of therecirculation mode, except when maximumA/C performance is needed or for short times toavoid exterior odors.

Use the defog mode to clear the windows of fogor moisture and warm the passengers. Usethe defrost mode to remove fog or frost from thewindshield more quickly. When you select either ofthese modes, or the floor mode which alsohelps defog the windows slightly, the system runsthe air conditioning compressor and cancelsrecirculation mode to dry the air; however, therecirculation light will stay on. For best results,clear all snow and ice from the windshield beforedefrosting.

Turn the right knob to select the defog ordefrost mode.

168

- (Defog): This mode directs half of the air tothe windshield and the side window outlets,and half to the floor outlets.

0 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air tothe windshield and the side window outlets, withsome air directed to the floor outlets.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog from the rear window.

The rear window defogger will only work when theignition is in RUN.

< (Rear): Press this button to turn the rearwindow defogger on or off. An indicator light onthe button will come on to let you know thatthe rear window defogger is activated.

The rear window defogger will only work when theignition is in RUN. The rear window defoggerwill stay on for about 10 minutes after the button ispressed, unless the ignition is turned to ACC orLOCK. If turned on again, the defogger willonly run for about five minutes before turning off.The defogger can also be turned off by pressingthe button again or by turning off the engine.

Notice: Do not use anything sharp onthe inside of the rear window. If you do, youcould cut or damage the warming grid, and therepairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not attach a temporary vehiclelicense, tape, a decal or anything similar to thedefogger grid.

169

Outlet AdjustmentUse the louvers located on the air outlets tochange the direction of the airflow.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the

air inlets at the base of the vehicle that mayblock the flow of air into your vehicle.

• Do not use any non-GM approved hooddeflectors that could adversely affect theperformance of the system.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear ofobjects to help circulate the air inside ofyour vehicle more effectively.

Passenger Compartment Air FilterThe outside air is routed through a passengercompartment air filter before entering the vehicle.This filter removes certain particles from theair, including pollen and dust particles. Reductionsin airflow, which may occur more quickly industy areas, indicate that the filter needs to bereplaced early.

The filter should be replaced as part of routinescheduled maintenance. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 440 for when to replacethe filter.

170

To change the passenger compartment air filter,use the following steps:

1. Remove the push pins from the rear of thepassenger’s side air inlet panel. It is locatedin the rear of the engine compartment onthe passenger side of the vehicle.

2. Open the hood.

3. Remove the push pins from the top andforward edge of the passenger’s side airinlet panel.

4. Remove the air inlet panel.

5. Remove the filter from the filter housing bypressing the release tab at the inboard edgeof the filter housing.

6. Remove the filter from the vehicle.

7. Install a new passenger compartment air filter.For the type of filter to use see NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 450.

8. Reverse Steps 1 through 5.

171

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gagesthat may be on your vehicle. The pictures willhelp you locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal that somethingis wrong before it becomes serious enough tocause an expensive repair or replacement. Payingattention to your warning lights and gages couldalso save you or others from injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be oris a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.As you will see in the details on the followingpages, some warning lights come on briefly whenyou start the engine just to let you know theyare working. If you are familiar with this section,you should not be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Oftengages and warning lights work together to let youknow when there is a problem with your vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on andstays on when you are driving, or when one of thegages shows there may be a problem, checkthe section that tells you what to do aboutit. Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting todo repairs can be costly and even dangerous.So please get to know your warning lightsand gages. They are a big help.

172

Instrument Panel ClusterYour instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. Youwill know how fast you are going, how much fuel you are using, and many other things you will needto drive safely and economically.

United States version shown, Canada similar

173

Speedometer and OdometerYour speedometer lets you see your speedin both miles per hour (mph) and kilometersper hour (km/h).

Your odometer shows how far your vehiclehas been driven, in either miles (used in theUnited States) or kilometers (used in Canada).

Your vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer.The digital odometer will read 999,999 if someonetries to turn it back.

You may wonder what happens if your vehicleneeds a new odometer installed. If the newone can be set to the mileage total of the oldodometer, then it must be. If not, then it is set atzero and a label must be put on the driver’s door toshow the old mileage reading when the newodometer was installed.

Trip OdometerYour trip odometer is located in the DriverInformation Center and shows how far your vehiclehas been driven since the trip odometer waslast reset. For more information see DIC Operationand Displays on page 195.

TachometerThe tachometer shows your engine speed inrevolutions per minute (rpm).

Notice: If you operate the engine with thetachometer in the solid red area, your vehiclecould be damaged. The damages wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Do notoperate the engine in the solid red area.

174

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to RUN or START, achime will come on for several seconds to remindpeople to fasten their safety belts, unless thedriver’s safety belt is already buckled.

The safety belt light willalso come on and stayon for several seconds,then it will flash forseveral more.

If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither thechime nor the light will come on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder LightSeveral seconds after the key is turned to RUN orSTART, a chime will sound for several seconds toremind the front passenger to buckle their safetybelt. This would only occur if the passenger airbagis enabled. See Passenger Sensing System onpage 82 for more information. The passengersafety belt light will also come on and stay on forseveral seconds, then it will flash for several more.

This chime and light willbe repeated if thepassenger remainsunbuckled andthe vehicle is in motion.

If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.

175

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on the instrumentpanel, which shows the airbag symbol. The systemchecks the airbag’s electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. The system check includes theairbag sensor, the airbag modules, the wiring andthe crash sensing and diagnostic module.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flashfor a few seconds.Then the light should goout. This means thesystem is ready.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,your airbag system may not work properly.Have your vehicle serviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly. Theairbags in your vehicle may not inflate ina crash, or they could even inflate withouta crash. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle serviced rightaway if the airbag readiness light stays onafter you start your vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for afew seconds when you turn the ignition key toRUN. If the light does not come on then, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn you if there isa problem.

176

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorYour vehicle has the passenger sensing system.Your instrument panel has a passenger airbagstatus indicator.

When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START,the passenger airbag status indicator will lightON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,for several seconds as a system check. Then,after several more seconds, the status indicatorwill light either ON or OFF, or either the onor off symbol, to let you know the status of theright front passenger’s frontal airbag.

If your vehicle has a rear seat that willaccommodate a rear-facing child restraint, there isa label on your sun visor that says, “Never puta rear-facing child seat in the front.” This isbecause the risk to the rear-facing child is so greatif the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:



177


{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints betransported in vehicles with a rear seatthat will accommodate a rear-facing childrestraint, whenever possible.

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, it means thatthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled(may inflate).

{CAUTION:

If the on indicator comes on when you havea rear-facing child restraint installed in theright front passenger’s seat, it means thatthe passenger sensing system has notturned off the passenger’s frontal airbag.A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in the right front passenger’sseat if the airbag is turned on.

178

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on theairbag status indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system has turned off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag. See PassengerSensing System on page 82 for more on this,including important safety information.

If, after several seconds, all status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lights or the passengersensing system. See your dealer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the off indicator and the airbagreadiness light ever come on together, itmeans that something may be wrong withthe airbag system. If this ever happens,have the vehicle serviced promptly,because an adult-size person sitting in theright front passenger seat may not havethe protection of the frontal airbag. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 176.

Battery Warning Light

The battery warning lightwill come on briefly as acheck, when you turn onthe ignition. Then itshould go out when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on when you start yourvehicle, have your vehicle serviced right away.This condition may indicate your battery warninglight is not functioning properly. If this lightcomes on while you are driving, be sure to turn offaccessories such as the radio and climatecontrol system. Have your vehicle serviced rightaway. The SERVICE BATTERY CHARGINGSYSTEM message may also appear in the DriverInformation Center. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 200 for more information.

179

Brake System Warning LightYour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part is not working, the otherpart can still work and stop you. For goodbraking, though, you need both parts working well.

If the brake system warning light comes on,there is a brake problem. Have your brake systeminspected right away.

The brake light is located in the instrument panelcluster.

This light should come on briefly when you turnthe ignition key to RUN. If it does not comeon then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warnyou if there is a problem.

When the ignition is on, the brake light will comeon when you set your parking brake. The lightwill stay on if your parking brake does not releasefully. A chime will also sound if the parkingbrake is not fully released and the vehicle ismoving. If it stays on after your parking brake isfully released, it means you have a brake problem.

The brake light will also come on to indicate alow brake fluid level. See Brakes on page 369 formore information.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull offthe road and stop carefully. You may noticethat the pedal is harder to push or the pedal maygo closer to the floor. It may take longer tostop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towedfor service. See Towing Your Vehicle onpage 326.


180

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on after you have pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.

Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light

With the Anti-LockBrake System (ABS),the light will comeon when your engine isstarted and stay onfor several seconds.This is normal.

If the ABS warning light comes on and stays on,there may be a problem with the anti-lockportion of the brake system. If the brake systemwarning light is not on, you still have brakes,but you do not have anti-lock brakes. See BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 180 for moreinformation.

If the light stays on, turn the ignition to LOCK. If thelight comes on when you are driving, stop as soonas possible and turn the ignition off. Then start theengine again to reset the system. If the light stillstays on, or comes on again while you are driving,your vehicle needs service. If the regular brakesystem warning light is not on, you still have brakes,but you do not have anti-lock brakes. If the regularbrake system warning light is also on, you do nothave anti-lock brakes and there is a problem withyour regular brakes. See Brake System WarningLight on page 180 for more information.

The ABS warning light should come on brieflywhen you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the lightdoes not come on then, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn you if there is a problem.

181

Traction Control System (TCS)Warning Light

Your vehicle has aTraction ControlSystem (TCS) andStabiliTrak® warninglight.

This light will come on when the TCS is limitingwheel spin or when the StabiliTrak® systemis active. You may feel or hear the system working,but this is normal.

If the TCS warning light comes on and stays onfor an extended period of time when the system isturned on, your vehicle needs service. SeeTraction Control System (TCS) on page 297 andStabiliTrak® System on page 298 for moreinformation.

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light

The engine coolanttemperature warninglight will come on whenthe engine hasoverheated.

If this happens you should pull over and turn offthe engine as soon as possible. See EngineOverheating on page 360 for more information.

Notice: Driving with the engine coolanttemperature warning light on could cause yourvehicle to overheat. See Engine Overheatingon page 360. Your vehicle could be damaged,and it might not be covered by your warranty.Never drive with the engine coolanttemperature warning light on.

This light will also come on when starting yourvehicle. If it does not, have your vehicle serviced.

182

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage measures thetemperature of thevehicle’s engine.

If the indicator needle moves towards the shadedin thermostat, the engine is too hot. The enginecoolant temperature warning light will turn on. SeeEngine Coolant Temperature Warning Light onpage 182 for more information.

If you have been operating your vehicle undernormal driving conditions, and the engine coolanttemperature warning light comes on, youshould pull off the road, stop your vehicle and turnoff the engine as soon as possible.

Tire Pressure Light

This light will come onbriefly when you turnthe ignition to RUN.

This light will also come on when one or more ofyour tires are significantly underinflated.

A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE DIC message willaccompany the light.

Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to doso. If underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure.See Tires on page 386 for more information.

This light will flash for 60 seconds and then turnon solid if a problem is detected with the TirePressure Monitor system.

See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 395for more information.

183

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle has acomputer whichmonitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition,and emission controlsystems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intendedto assure that emissions are at acceptablelevels for the life of the vehicle, helping to producea cleaner environment. The check engine lightcomes on to indicate that there is a problem andservice is required. Malfunctions often will beindicated by the system before any problem isapparent. This may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle. This system is also designed toassist your service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light on, after awhile, your emissioncontrols may not work as well, your fueleconomy may not be as good, and your enginemay not run as smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that may not be covered by yourwarranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof your vehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other than those of the sameTire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affectyour vehicle’s emission controls and maycause this light to come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. This may alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 339.

184

This light should come on, as a check to showyou it is working, when the ignition is on and theengine is not running. If the light does notcome on, have it repaired. This light will alsocome on during a malfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and may damage the emissioncontrol system on your vehicle. Diagnosis andservice may be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected on yourvehicle. Diagnosis and service may berequired.

If the Light is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amountof cargo being hauled as soon as it ispossible

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to doso, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to parkyour vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds and restart the engine. If the lightremains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”following. If the light is still flashing, follow theprevious steps, and see your dealer for service assoon as possible.

185

If the Light Is On SteadyYou may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 343.The diagnostic system can determine if thefuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving tripswith the cap properly installed should turn thelight off.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. Thecondition will usually be corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 341. Poor fuelquality will cause your engine not to run asefficiently as designed. You may notice this asstalling after start-up, stalling when you putthe vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine iswarmed up.) This will be detected by the systemand cause the light to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require atleast one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.

If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.Your dealer has the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electricalproblems that may have developed.

186

Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor may begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know to helpyour vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if thecheck engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection ifthe OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determinesthat critical emission control systems have notbeen completely diagnosed by the system.The vehicle would be considered not ready forinspection. This can happen if you have recentlyreplaced your battery or if your battery hasrun down. The diagnostic system is designed toevaluate critical emission control systemsduring normal driving. This may take several daysof routine driving. If you have done this andyour vehicle still does not pass the inspection forlack of OBD system readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle for inspection.

Oil Pressure Light

If you have a low engineoil pressure problem,this light will stay on afteryou start your engine, orcome on when you aredriving.

This indicates that your engine is not receivingenough oil.

The engine could be low on oil, or could havesome other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately.The oil light could also come on in three othersituations:

• When the ignition is on but the engine is notrunning, the light will come on as a test toshow you it is working, but the light will go outwhen you turn the ignition to START. If itdoes not come on with the ignition on,you may have a problem with the fuse or bulb.Have it fixed right away.

187

• If the vehicle is idling at a stop sign, the lightmay blink on and then off.

• If you make a hard stop, the light may comeon for a moment. This is normal.

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can become sohot that it catches fire. You or otherscould be burned. Check your oil as soonas possible and have your vehicleserviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

Change Engine Oil Light

If this light comes onand stays on for30 seconds, it meansthat service is requiredfor your vehicle.

After having the oil changed you will need to resetthe light. See Engine Oil on page 349 andScheduled Maintenance on page 440 for moreinformation.

188

Security LightYour vehicle is equippedwith a theft-deterrentsystem. With thissystem, the securitylight will flash asyou open the door ifyour ignition is off.

This light will come on briefly when the vehicle isturned on.

For more information, see PASS-Key® III+Operation on page 113.

Fog Lamp LightThe fog lamp light willcome on when the foglamps are in use.

The light will go out when the fog lamps areturned off. See Fog Lamps on page 161 for moreinformation.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes onwhenever you set thecruise control.

The light goes out when the cruise control isturned off. See Cruise Control on page 155 formore information.

189

Reduced Engine Power Light

This light will come onbriefly when you startthe engine.

This light, along with the service vehicle soonlight, will be displayed when a noticeable reductionin the vehicle’s performance may occur. Stopthe vehicle and turn off the ignition. Wait for10 seconds and restart your vehicle. This maycorrect the condition. See Service VehicleSoon Light on page 192 for more information.

The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speedwhen the reduced engine power light is on,but acceleration and speed may be reduced. Theperformance may be reduced until the nexttime you drive your vehicle. If this light stays on,see your dealer as soon as possible for diagnosisand repair.

Highbeam On Light

This light comes onwhen the high-beamheadlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 152.

190

Service All-Wheel Drive Light

This light is located inthe center of yourinstrument panel cluster.

This light and the SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVEmessage in the Driver Information Center (DIC) willcome on and stay on to indicate that there may be aproblem with the drive system and service isrequired. See All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System onpage 299 and DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 200 for more information.

All-Wheel Drive Disabled Light

This light will come onwhen the rear drivesystem is overheating.

An ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF message will appearin the Driver Information Center (DIC) too. Thislight will turn off when the rear drive system coolsdown. If this light stays on for a while, youneed to reset the light. To reset the light, turn theignition off and then back on again. If the lightstays on, see your dealer right away.

See All-Wheel Drive on page 378 and DICWarnings and Messages on page 200 for moreinformation.

191

Gate Ajar Light

If this light comes on,your liftgate is notcompletely closed.Driving with the liftgateopen can causecarbon monoxide (CO)to enter the vehicle.

See Engine Exhaust on page 127 for moreinformation.

Door Ajar Light

This light will come onwhen a door is ajar.

Do not drive with a door ajar.

Service Vehicle Soon Light

This light will come on ifa condition exists thatmay require thevehicle to be taken infor service.

If the light comes on, see your dealer for serviceas soon as possible.

Fuel Gage

When the ignition is on,the fuel gage tells youabout how muchfuel you have left inyour tank.

192

When the indicator nears empty, the low fuel lightwill come on. You still have a little fuel left, butyou should get more soon. See Low Fuel WarningLight on page 192 for more information.

Here are four things that some owners ask about.None of these show a problem with your fuel gage:

• At the service station, the fuel pump shuts offbefore the gage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up thanthe gage indicated. For example, the gage mayhave indicated the tank was half full, but itactually took a little more or less than half thetank’s capacity to fill the tank.

• The gage moves a little when you turn a corneror speed up.

• The gage takes a few seconds to stabilize afterthe ignition is turned on, and will go back toempty when you turn the ignition off.

For your fuel tank capacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 436.

Low Fuel Warning Light

The light below the fuelgage will come onbriefly when you arestarting the engine.

This light also comes on when the fuel tank is lowon fuel. When you add fuel the light should gooff. If it does not, have your vehicle serviced.

193

Driver Information Center (DIC)Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).

All messages will appear in the DIC displaylocated in the center of the instrument panelcluster. The DIC buttons are located on the centerof the instrument panel.

The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After ashort delay, the DIC will display the informationthat was last displayed before the engine wasturned off.

The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle systeminformation, and warning messages if a systemproblem is detected. The top of the DIC displayshows the shift lever position indicator. SeeAutomatic Transaxle Operation on page 119 formore information.

If your vehicle has this feature, the DIC alsodisplays the outside air temperature when viewingthe trip and fuel information. If there is a problemwith the system that controls the temperaturedisplay, the numbers will be replaced with dashes.If this occurs, have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If an abnormal temperature reading isdisplayed for an extended period of time, consultyour dealer. Under certain circumstances,especially when the engine is idling, a delayupdating the temperature display is normal.

The DIC also allows some features to bepersonalized. See DIC Vehicle Personalization onpage 210 for more information.

194

DIC Operation and DisplaysThe DIC has different displays which can beaccessed by pressing the DIC buttons located onthe center of the instrument panel.

DIC Buttons

The buttons are the trip/fuel, vehicle information,and set/reset buttons. The button functionsare detailed in the following pages.

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scrollthrough the trip and fuel displays. See “Trip/FuelMenu Items” following for more information onthese displays.

T (Vehicle Information): Press this button toscroll through the vehicle information displaysand to personalize the feature settings onyour vehicle. See “Vehicle Information MenuItems” following and DIC Vehicle Personalizationon page 210 for more information on thesedisplays.

V (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or resetcertain functions and to turn off or acknowledgemessages on the DIC.

195

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scrollthrough the following displays:

ODOMETERPress the trip/fuel button until ODOMETERdisplays. This display shows the distance thevehicle has been driven in either miles (mi)or kilometers (km). This display will also show theoutside air temperature in either degreesFahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).

To change the DIC display to English or metricunits, see “UNITS” later in this section.

TRIPPress the trip/fuel button until TRIP displays. Thisdisplay shows the current distance traveled ineither miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the lastreset for each trip odometer. Both trip odometerscan be used at the same time. This displaywill also show the outside air temperature in eitherdegrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).

Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separatelyby pressing the set/reset button while the desiredtrip odometer is displayed.

AVERAGE SPEEDPress the trip/fuel button until AVERAGE SPEEDdisplays. This display shows the average speedof the vehicle in miles per hour (mph) or kilometersper hour (km/h). This average is calculatedbased on the various vehicle speeds recordedsince the last reset of this value. To resetthe value, press and hold the set/reset button.The display will return to zero.

196

AVG (Average) ECONOMYPress the trip/fuel button until AVG ECONOMYdisplays. This display shows the approximateaverage miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km). This number iscalculated based on the number of mpg (L/100 km)recorded since the last time this menu item wasreset. To reset this display, press and hold theset/reset button. The display will return to zero.

RANGEPress the trip/fuel button until RANGE displays.This display shows the approximate numberof remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) thevehicle can be driven without refueling.

The fuel range estimate is based on an average ofthe vehicle’s fuel economy over recent drivinghistory and the amount of fuel remaining in the fueltank. This estimate will change if driving conditionschange. For example, if driving in traffic and makingfrequent stops, this display may read one number,but if the vehicle is driven on a freeway, the numbermay change even though the same amount of fuelis in the fuel tank. This is because different drivingconditions produce different fuel economies.Generally, freeway driving produces better fueleconomy than city driving.

If your vehicle is low on fuel, the FUEL LEVELLOW message will be displayed. See “FUELLEVEL LOW” under DIC Warnings and Messageson page 200 for more information.

Blank DisplayThis display shows no information.

197

Vehicle Information Menu Items

T (Vehicle Information): Press this button toscroll through the following displays:

OIL LIFEPress the vehicle information button until OIL LIFEREMAINING displays. This display shows anestimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. If yousee 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display,that means 99% of the current oil life remains. Theengine oil life system will alert you to changeyour oil on a schedule consistent with your drivingconditions.

When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message will appear onthe display. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”under DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 200. You should change your oil as soon aspossible. See Engine Oil on page 349. Inaddition to the engine oil life system monitoringthe oil life, additional maintenance isrecommended in the Maintenance Schedule in thismanual. See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 440 for more information.

Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourselfafter each oil change. It will not reset itself.Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFEaccidentally at any time other than when the oilhas just been changed. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oil change. To reset theengine oil life system, see Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 352.

UNITSPress the vehicle information button until UNITSdisplays. This display allows you to select betweenEnglish or Metric units of measurement. Once inthis display, press the set/reset button to selectbetween ENGLISH or METRIC units.

FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRESThe pressure for each tire can be viewed in theDIC. The tire pressure will be shown in eitherpounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).Press the vehicle information button until theDIC shows FRONT TIRES PSI (kPa) LF ## (###)RF ## (###). Press the vehicle informationbutton again until the DIC displays REAR TIRESPSI (kPa) LR ## (###) RR ## (###).

198

If a low or high tire pressure condition is detectedby the system while driving, a message advisingyou to check the pressure in a specific tirewill appear in the display. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 393 and DIC Warningsand Messages on page 200 for more information.

If the tire pressure display shows dashesinstead of a value, there may be a problem withyour vehicle. If this consistently occurs, seeyour dealer for service.

BATTERYPress the vehicle information button untilBATTERY displays. This display shows thecurrent battery voltage. If the voltage is low, thedisplay will show LOW. If the voltage is high,the display will show HIGH. Your vehicle’scharging system regulates voltage based on thestate of the battery. The battery voltage mayfluctuate when viewing this information on the DIC.This is normal. See Battery Warning Light onpage 179 for more information.

If there is a problem with the battery chargingsystem, the DIC will display SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM. See “SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM” under DIC Warningsand Messages on page 200 for more information.

TIRE LOCATIONSAfter rotating the tires or after replacing a tire orsensor, the system must re-learn the tire positions.To re-learn the tire positions, see Tire PressureMonitor System on page 395. See Tire Inspectionand Rotation on page 399 and DIC Warningsand Messages on page 200 for more information.

RELEARN REMOTE KEYThis display allows you to match the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle.To match a RKE transmitter to your vehicle, do thefollowing:

1. Make sure the vehicle is in PARK (P).

2. Press the vehicle information button untilPRESS V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEYdisplays.

199

3. Press the set/reset button.The message REMOTE KEY LEARNINGACTIVE will display.

4. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttonson the first transmitter at the same time forabout 15 seconds.A chime will sound indicating that thetransmitter is matched.

5. To match additional transmitters at this time,repeat Step 3.Each vehicle can have a maximum of fourtransmitters matched to it.

6. To exit the programming mode, you mustcycle the key to LOCK.

Blank DisplayThis display shows no information.

PERSONALIZATIONThis display allows you to personalize the featuresettings on your vehicle. See DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 210 for more information.

DIC Warnings and MessagesMessages are displayed on the DIC to notify thedriver that the status of the vehicle has changedand that some action may be needed by the driverto correct the condition. Multiple messages mayappear one after another.

Some messages may not require immediateaction, but you can press the set/reset button toacknowledge that you received the messages andto clear them from the display. Pressing any ofthe DIC buttons also acknowledge and clear anymessages.

Some messages cannot be cleared from the DICdisplay because they are more urgent. Thesemessages require action before they can becleared. You should take any messages thatappear on the display seriously and remember thatclearing the messages will only make themessages disappear, not correct the problem.

The following are the possible messages that canbe displayed and some information about them.

200

ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFFIf your vehicle has the All-Wheel Drive (AWD)system, this message displays along withthe All-Wheel Drive Disabled light when the reardrive system is overheating. This messageturns off when the rear drive system cools down.If the warning message stays on for a while,you need to reset the warning message. To resetthe warning message, turn the ignition off andthen back on again. If the message stays on, seeyour dealer right away. See All-Wheel Drive(AWD) System on page 299 and All-Wheel DriveDisabled Light on page 191 for more information.

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVEThis message displays when the charging systemdetects that the battery is being drained. Youmay notice that the vehicle attempts to reduce thedrain for you by turning off accessories, suchas interior fans, rear defogger, and heated seats.Turn off all accessories. If the vehicle is notrunning, start and run the engine for at least10 minutes to allow the battery to recharge. If theengine is running and the condition persists,see your dealer immediately.

BUCKLE PASSENGER SEATBELTThis message reminds you to buckle thepassenger’s safety belt. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 82.

This message displays and a chime sounds whenthe ignition is on, the driver’s safety belt isbuckled, the passenger’s safety belt is unbuckledwith the passenger airbag enabled, and thevehicle is in motion. You should have thepassenger buckle their safety belt.

This reminder will be repeated if the ignition is on,the vehicle is in motion, the driver is buckledand the passenger is still unbuckled, andthe passenger airbag is enabled. If thepassenger’s safety belt is already buckled, thismessage and chime will not come on.

201

BUCKLE SEATBELTThis message reminds you to buckle the driver’ssafety belt.

This message displays and a chime sounds whenthe ignition is on, the driver’s safety belt isunbuckled, and the vehicle is in motion. Youshould buckle your safety belt.

If the driver remains unbuckled when the ignitionis on and the vehicle is in motion, the reminderwill be repeated. If the driver’s safety belt isalready buckled, this message and chime will notcome on.

This message is an additional reminder to theSafety Belt Reminder Light in the instrument panelcluster. See Safety Belt Reminder Light onpage 175.

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONThis message displays when service is requiredfor the vehicle. See your dealer. See Engine Oil onpage 349 and Scheduled Maintenance onpage 440 for more information.

Acknowledging this message will not reset the OILLIFE REMAINING display. That must be doneat the OIL LIFE screen under the vehicleinformation menu. See “OIL LIFE” under DICOperation and Displays on page 195 and EngineOil Life System on page 352 for more information.

CHECK TIRE PRESSUREThis message displays when the tire pressure inone of the tires needs to be checked. This messagealso displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFTREAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate which tire needsto be checked. You can receive more than one tirepressure message at a time. To read the othermessages that may have been sent at the sametime, press the set/reset button. If a tire pressuremessage appears on the DIC, stop as soon as youcan. Have the tire pressures checked and set tothose shown on the Tire Loading Information label.See Tires on page 386, Loading Your Vehicle onpage 321, and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 393. The DIC display also shows the tirepressure values for the front and rear tires bypressing the vehicle information button. See DICOperation and Displays on page 195. If the tirepressure is low, the low tire pressure warning lightcomes on. See Tire Pressure Light on page 183.

202

DRIVER DOOR OPENThis message displays when the driver’s door isnot closed properly. When this message appears,make sure that the driver’s door is closedcompletely.

ENGINE HOT A/C(Air Conditioning) OFFThis message displays when the engine coolantbecomes hotter than the normal operatingtemperature. To avoid added strain on a hotengine, the air conditioning compressor isautomatically turned off. When the coolanttemperature returns to normal, the A/C operationautomatically resumes. You can continue todrive your vehicle.

ENGINE OVERHEATD (Overheated)IDLE ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while theengine is overheating, severe engine damagemay occur. If an overheat warning appearson the instrument panel cluster and/orDIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible.Do not increase the engine speed abovenormal idling speed. See Engine Overheatingon page 360 for more information.

This message displays when the engine coolanttemperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicleto idle until it cools down.

203

ENGINE OVERHEATD (Overheated)STOP ENGINENotice: If you drive your vehicle while theengine is overheating, severe engine damagemay occur. If an overheat warning appears onthe instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stopthe vehicle as soon as possible. See EngineOverheating on page 360 for more information.

This message displays along with a continuouschime when the engine has overheated. Stop andturn the engine off immediately to avoid severeengine damage. See Engine Overheating onpage 360.

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCEDThis message displays when the vehicle’s enginepower is reduced. Reduced engine power canaffect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If thismessage is on, but there is no reduction inperformance, proceed to your destination. Theperformance may be reduced the next time thevehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at areduced speed while this message is on, butacceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytimethis message stays on, the vehicle should be takento your dealer for service as soon as possible.

FUEL LEVEL LOWThis message displays when your vehicle is lowon fuel. Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible.See Fuel Gage on page 192 and Filling the Tankon page 343 for more information.

HOOD OPENThis message displays on some vehicles whenthe hood is not closed properly. When thismessage appears, make sure that the hood isclosed completely. See Hood Release onpage 347.

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CAREThis message displays when the outside airtemperature is cold enough to create icy roadconditions. Adjust your driving accordingly.

LIFTGATE OPENThis message displays when the liftgate is notclosed completely. Make sure that the liftgate isclosed completely. See Liftgate on page 107.

204

OIL PRSSURE (Pressure) LOW STOPENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while theengine oil pressure is low, severe enginedamage may occur. If a low oil pressurewarning appears on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), stop the vehicle as soon aspossible. Do not drive the vehicle until thecause of the low oil pressure is corrected. SeeEngine Oil on page 349 for more information.

This message displays when the vehicle’sengine oil pressure is low. The oil pressure lightalso appears on the instrument panel cluster. SeeOil Pressure Light on page 187.

Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damagecan result from driving a vehicle with low oilpressure. Have the vehicle serviced by your dealeras soon as possible when this message isdisplayed.

PASSENGER DOOR FRONT/REAR OPENThis message displays when one or more of thepassenger’s doors are not closed properly.When this message appears, make sure that allpassenger doors are closed completely.

REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVEThis message displays while you are matching aRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter toyour vehicle. See “LEARN REMOTE KEY” underDIC Operation and Displays on page 195 formore information.

SERVICE A/C (Air Conditioning)SYSTEMThis message displays when there is a problemdetected in the air conditioning system. Havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.

SERVICE AIR BAGThis message displays when there is a problemwith the airbag system. Have your vehicle servicedby your dealer immediately. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 176 for more information.

205

SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVEIf your vehicle has the All-Wheel Drive (AWD)system, this message displays along withthe service all-wheel drive light if a problem occurswith this system. See Service All-Wheel DriveLight on page 191. If this message appears, stopas soon as possible and turn off the vehicle.Restart the vehicle and check for the message onthe DIC display. If the message is still displayedor appears again when you begin driving, the AWDsystem needs service. See your dealer.

SERVICE BATTERY CHARGINGSYSTEMThis message displays when there is a problemwith the generator and battery charging systems.Driving with this problem could drain thevehicle’s battery. Turn off all unnecessaryaccessories. Stop and turn off the vehicle as soonas it is safe to do so. Have the electrical systemchecked by your dealer immediately.

Connecting a battery charger to your vehicle whilethe ignition is in any position other than LOCKmay cause this message to appear. If you need tocharge your vehicle, make sure that the key isin LOCK or out of the ignition during charging.

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEMThis message displays and a chime sounds whenthe brake fluid level is low. The brake systemwarning light also appears on the instrument panelcluster when this message appears on the DIC.See Brake System Warning Light on page 180.Have the brake system serviced by your dealer assoon as possible.

SERVICE POWER STEERINGOn some vehicles, this message displays when aproblem is detected with the power steeringsystem. When this message is displayed, you maynotice that the effort required to steer the vehicleincreases or feels heavier, but you will still be ableto steer the vehicle. Have your vehicle servicedby your dealer immediately.

206

SERVICE STABILITRAKThis message displays if there has been aproblem detected with the StabiliTrak® System.A warning light also appears on the instrumentpanel cluster. See Traction Control System (TCS)Warning Light on page 182. See StabiliTrak®

System on page 298 for more information.

If this message turns on while you are driving, pulloff the road as soon as possible and stopcarefully. Try resetting the system by turning theignition off and then back on. If this messagestill stays on or turns back on again while you aredriving, your vehicle needs service. Have theStabiliTrak® System inspected by your dealer assoon as possible.

SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEMThis message displays when there is a problemwith the theft-deterrent system. A fault hasbeen detected in the system which means that thesystem is disabled and it is not protecting thevehicle. The vehicle usually restarts; however, youmay want to take the vehicle to your dealerbefore turning off the engine. See PASS-Key® III+Operation on page 113 for more information.

SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEMThis message displays if a part on the TirePressure Monitor (TPM) system is not workingproperly. If you drive your vehicle while any of thefour sensors are missing or inoperable, thewarning comes on in about 20 minutes. A sensorwould be missing, for example, if you putdifferent wheels on your vehicle withouttransferring the sensors. If the warning comes onand stays on, there may be a problem with theTPM. See your dealer.

SERVICE TRACTION CONTROLThis message displays when the Traction ControlSystem (TCS) is not functioning properly. Awarning light also appears on the instrument panelcluster. See Traction Control System (TCS)Warning Light on page 182 and Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 297 for more information.Have the TCS serviced by your dealer as soonas possible.

207

SERVICE VEHICLE SOONThis message displays when a non-emissionsrelated malfunction occurs. Have the vehicleserviced by your dealer as soon as possible.

STABILITRAK NOT READYThis message may display and a warning light onthe instrument panel cluster may be on afterfirst driving the vehicle and exceeding 30 mph(48 km/h) for 30 seconds. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Warning Light on page 182.The StabiliTrak® System is not functional until thelight has turned off. See StabiliTrak® Systemon page 298 for more information.

STABILITRAK OFFThis message displays any time the StabiliTrak®

System turns off. When this message hasbeen displayed, StabiliTrak® is no longer availableto assist you with directional control of thevehicle. Adjust your driving accordingly. SeeStabiliTrak® System on page 298.

This message displays only while the ignition isin RUN.

Any of the following conditions may cause theStabiliTrak® System to turn off:

• The StabiliTrak® System is turned off bypressing and holding the traction controlbutton. See StabiliTrak® System on page 298for more information.

• The battery is low.

• There is a StabiliTrak® System failure. Seeyour dealer for service.

STARTING DISABLD (Disabled)SERVICE THRTTLE (Throttle)This message displays if the starting of the engineis disabled due to the electronic throttle controlsystem. Have your vehicle serviced by your dealerimmediately.

This message only appears while the ignition is inRUN, and will not disappear until the problemis resolved.

This message cannot be acknowledged.

208

THEFT ATTEMPTEDThis message displays if the content theft-deterrentsystem has detected a break-in attempt whileyou were away from your vehicle. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 111 for more information.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVEThis message displays when the Tire PressureMonitor (TPM) system is re-learning the tirepositions. See Tire Pressure Monitor System onpage 395. The tire positions must be re-learnedafter rotating the tires or after replacing a tireor sensor. See Tire Inspection and Rotation onpage 399 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 393for more information.

TRACTION CONTROL OFFThis message displays when the Traction ControlSystem (TCS) turns off. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 297 for more information.

This message only displays while the ignitionis in RUN and disappears after 10 seconds, unlessit is acknowledged or an urgent warning appears.

Any of the following conditions may cause theTCS to turn off:

• The TCS is turned off by pressing thetraction control button. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 297 for moreinformation.

• The battery is low.

• There is a TCS failure. See your dealer forservice.

TRACTION CONTROL ONThis message displays when the Traction ControlSystem (TCS) turns on. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 297 for more information.

TURN SIGNAL ONThis message displays as a reminder to turn offthe turn signal if you drive your vehicle formore than about 0.75 mile (1.2 km) with a turnsignal on. See Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever onpage 151.

This message displays and a chime sounds onlywhen the ignition is in RUN. The message willnot disappear until the turn signal is manuallyturned off, or a turn is completed.

209

DIC Vehicle PersonalizationYour vehicle has personalization capabilities thatallow you to program certain features to onepreferred setting.

All of the personalization options may not beavailable on your vehicle. Only the optionsavailable will be displayed on the DIC.

The default settings for the personalizationfeatures were set when your vehicle left thefactory, but may have been changed from theirdefault state since then.

The personalization preferences are automaticallyrecalled.

To change personalization preferences, use thefollowing procedure.

Entering the Feature Settings Menu1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in

PARK (P).To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it isrecommended that the headlamps areturned off.

2. Press the vehicle information button untilFEATURE SETTINGS PRESS V TOSELECT appears on the DIC display.

3. Press the set/reset button to enter the featuresettings menu.If the menu is not available, FEATURESETTINGS AVAILABLE IN PRK (Park) willdisplay. Before entering the menu, make surethe vehicle is in PARK (P).

Feature Settings Menu ItemsThe following are personalization features thatallow you to program settings to the vehicle:

DISPLAY ENGLISHThis feature will only display if a language otherthan English has been set. This feature allows youto change the language in which the DICmessages appear to English.

Press the vehicle information button until thePRESS V TO DISPLAY ENGLISH screen appearson the DIC display. Press the set/reset button todisplay all DIC messages in English.

210

DISPLAY LANGUAGEThis feature allows you to select the language inwhich the DIC messages will appear.

Press the vehicle information button until DISPLAYLANGUAGE appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the vehicle informationbutton to scroll through the following settings:

ENGLISH (default): All messages will appearin English.

FRANCAIS (French): All messages will appearin French.

ESPANOL (Spanish): All messages will appearin Spanish.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to thisfeature. The current setting will remain.

Choose one of the available settings and pressthe set/reset button while it is displayed on the DICto select it.

AUTO LOCKThis feature allows you to select when thevehicle’s doors will automatically lock. SeeProgrammable Automatic Door Locks on page 105for more information.

Press the vehicle information button until AUTOLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the vehicle informationbutton to scroll through the following settings:

SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The vehicle’sdoors automatically lock when the doors areclosed and the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).

AT VEHICLE SPEED: The vehicle’s doorsautomatically lock when the vehicle speed is above5 mph (8 km/h) for three seconds.



211

AUTO UNLOCKThis feature allows you to select whether or not toturn off the automatic door unlocking feature.It also allows you to select which doors and whenthe doors will automatically unlock. SeeProgrammable Automatic Door Locks on page 105for more information.

Press the vehicle information button until AUTOUNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the vehicle informationbutton to scroll through the following settings:

OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.

DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s doorwill unlock when the key is taken out of theignition.

DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door willunlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).

ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlockwhen the key is taken out of the ignition.

ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors willunlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).



REMOTE LOCKThis feature allows you to select the type offeedback you will receive when locking the vehiclewith the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.You will not receive feedback when lockingthe vehicle with the RKE transmitter if any of thedoors are open. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 97 for moreinformation.

Press the vehicle information button until REMOTELOCK appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the vehicle informationbutton to scroll through the following settings:

OFF: There will be no feedback when you pressthe lock button on the RKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flashwhen you press the lock button on the RKEtransmitter.

212

HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the secondpress of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.

HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exteriorlamps will flash when you press the lock button onthe RKE transmitter, and the horn will soundwhen the lock button is pressed again withinfive seconds of the previous command.



REMOTE UNLOCKThis feature allows you to select the type offeedback you will receive when unlocking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter. You willnot receive feedback when unlocking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter if the doors are open. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operationon page 97 for more information.

Press the vehicle information button until REMOTEUNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the vehicle information buttonto scroll through the following settings:

LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flashwhen you press the unlock button on theRKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps willflash when you press the unlock button onthe RKE transmitter.



213

DELAY LOCKThis feature allows you to select whether or notthe locking of the vehicle’s doors will be delayed.The locking of the vehicle’s doors is delayedfor up to 10 seconds after a power door lock switchis pressed when a door is open, or after thelock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed whilea door is open. The key must be out of theignition for this feature to work. See DelayedLocking on page 105 for more information.

Press the vehicle information button until DELAYLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the vehicle informationbutton to scroll through the following settings:

OFF: There will be no delayed locking ofthe vehicle’s doors.

ON (default): The locking of the vehicle’s doorswill be delayed by 10 seconds after a powerdoor lock switch is pressed when a door is open,or the lock button on the RKE transmitter ispressed while a door is open.



EXIT LIGHTINGIf it is dark enough outside, this feature allows youto select the amount of time you want theexterior lamps to remain on. This happens afterthe key is turned from RUN to LOCK.

Press the vehicle information button until EXITLIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the vehicle information buttonto scroll through the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.

30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps willstay on for 30 seconds.

1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on forone minute.

214

2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on fortwo minutes.



APPROACH LIGHTINGThis feature allows you to select whether or not tohave the exterior lights turn on briefly duringlow light periods after unlocking the vehicle usingthe RKE transmitter.

Press the vehicle information button untilAPPROACH LIGHTING appears on the DICdisplay. Press the set/reset button to access thesettings for this feature. Then press the vehicleinformation button to scroll through the followingsettings:

OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when youunlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.

ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, theexterior lights will turn on briefly when you unlockthe vehicle with the RKE transmitter.

The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or untilthe lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed,or the vehicle is no longer off. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 97for more information.



CHIME VOLUMEThis feature allows you to select the volume levelof the chime.

Press the vehicle information button until CHIMEVOLUME appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the vehicle informationbutton to scroll through the following settings:

NORMAL (default): The chime volume will be setto a normal level.

LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loudlevel.

215



REMOTE STARTIf your vehicle has this feature, it allows you toturn the remote start off or on. The remotestart feature allows you to start the engine fromoutside of the vehicle using your RKE transmitter.See “Remote Vehicle Start” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 97for more information.

Press the vehicle information button until REMOTESTART appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the vehicle informationbutton to scroll through the following settings:

OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.

ON (default): The remote start feature will beenabled.



FACTORY SETTINGSThis feature allows you to set all of thepersonalization features back to their factorydefault settings.

Press the vehicle information button untilFACTORY SETTINGS appears on the DICdisplay. Press the set/reset button to access thesettings for this feature. Then press the vehicleinformation button to scroll through the followingsettings:

RESTORE ALL (default): The personalizationfeatures will be set to their factory default settings.

216

DO NOT RESTORE: The personalization featureswill not be set to their factory default settings.

Choose one of the available settings and press theset/reset button while it is displayed on the DICto select it.

EXIT FEATURE SETTINGSThis feature allows you to exit the featuresettings menu.

Press the vehicle information button untilFEATURE SETTINGS PRESS V TO EXITappears in the DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton to exit the menu.

If you do not exit, pressing the vehicle informationbutton again will return you to the beginning ofthe vehicle information menu.

Exiting the Feature Settings MenuThe feature settings menu will be exited when anyof the following occurs:

• The vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).

• The vehicle is no longer in RUN.

• The trip/fuel DIC button is pressed.

• The end of the feature settings menu isreached and exited.

• A 40 second time period has elapsed with noselection made.

217

Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.

Driving without distraction is a necessity for asafer driving experience. See Defensive Driving onpage 290. By taking a few moments to read thismanual and get familiar with your vehicle’saudio system, you can use it with less effort, aswell as take advantage of its features. While yourvehicle is parked, set up your audio system bypresetting your favorite radio stations, setting thetone and adjusting the speakers. Then, whendriving conditions permit, you can tune toyour favorite stations using the presets andsteering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.

{CAUTION:

This system provides you with a far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainmenttasks while driving can cause a crash andyou or others can be injured or killed.Always keep your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive — avoid engagingin extended searching while driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 290.

218

Here are some ways in which you can help avoiddistraction while driving.

While your vehicle is parked:

• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.

• Familiarize yourself with its operation.

• Set up your audio system by presetting yourfavorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

Notice: Before adding any sound equipment toyour vehicle, such as an audio system, CDplayer, CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-wayradio, make sure that it can be added bychecking with your dealer. Also, check federalrules covering mobile radio and telephoneunits. If sound equipment can be added, it isvery important to do it properly. Added soundequipment may interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systemsmay interfere with the operation of soundequipment that has been added.

Your vehicle has a feature called RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audiosystem can be played even after the ignition isturned off. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 116 for more information.

219

Setting the Time(Without Date Display)If your vehicle has an AM/FM base radio with asingle CD player and preset buttons numbered onethrough six, the radio will have a clock buttonfor setting the time. You can set the time byfollowing these steps:

1. Press the clock button until the hour numbersbegin flashing on the display. Press the clockbutton a second time and the minutenumbers will begin flashing on the display.

2. While either the hour or the minute numbersare flashing, turn the tune knob, located onthe upper right side of the radio, clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decreasethe time. Instead of using the tune knob, youcan also press the SEEK, FWD (forward),or REV (reverse) buttons to adjust the time.

3. Press the clock button again until the clockdisplay stops flashing to set the currentlydisplayed time; otherwise, the flashing will stopafter five seconds and the current timedisplayed will be automatically set.

To change the time default setting from 12 hour to24 hour, press the clock button and then thepushbutton located under the forward arrow label.Once the time 12H and 24H are displayed,press the pushbutton located under the desiredoption to select the default. Press the clock buttonagain to apply the selected default, or let thescreen time out.

Setting the Time (With Date Display)If your vehicle has a radio with a single CDplayer or a CD with DVD player, the radio willhave a clock button for setting the time and date.

To set the time and date, follow these instructions:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press the clock button and the HR, MIN, MM,DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, andyear) will appear on the display.

220

3. Press the pushbutton located under any oneof the labels that you want to change. Everytime the pushbutton is pressed again, the timeor the date if selected, will increase by one.

• Another way to increase the time or date, isto press the right SEEK arrow or FWD(forward) button.

• To decrease, press the left SEEK arrow orREV (reverse) button. You can also turnthe tune knob, located on the upperright side of the radio, to adjust the selectedsetting.

The date will not automatically display. The onlyway to see the date is by pressing the clock buttonwhen the radio is on. The date with display willtime out after a few seconds and go back tothe normal radio and time display.

If your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CDplayer, the radio will have a MENU button insteadof the clock button to set the time and date.

To set the time and date, follow these instructions:


2. Press the MENU button. Once the clockoption is displayed.

3. Press the pushbutton located under that label.The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY will appear onthe display.

4. Press the pushbutton located under any oneof the labels that you want to change. Everytime the pushbutton is pressed again, the timeor the date if selected, will increase by one.

• Another way to increase the time or date, isto press the right SEEK arrow or FWD(forward) button.

• To decrease, press the left SEEK arrow orREV (reverse) button. You can also turn thetune knob, located on the upper right side ofthe radio, to adjust the selected setting.

The date will not automatically display. The onlyway to see the date is by pressing the MENUbutton and then the clock button when the radio ison. The date with display will time out after afew seconds and go back to the normal radio andtime display.

221

To change the time default setting from 12 hour to24 hour or to change the date default settingfrom month/day/year to day/month/year, followthese instructions:

1. Press the clock button and then thepushbutton located under the forward arrowlabel. Once the time 12H and 24H, andthe date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day, and year)and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year)are displayed.

2. Press the pushbutton located under thedesired option.

3. Press the clock or MENU button again toapply the selected default, or let the screentime out.

Radio with CD (Base)

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn thesystem on and off.

Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the volume.

The radio remembers the previous volume settingwhenever the radio is turned on. You can stillmanually adjust the volume by using thevolume knob.

222

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2 or AM. The display shows the selection.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.

© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEKarrow to go to the next or to the previous stationand stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEKarrow for a few seconds until you hear a beep. Theradio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Press eitherSEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

The radio only seeks and scans stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

4 (Information): Press this button to switch thedisplay between the radio station frequencyand the time. When the ignition is off, press thisbutton to display the time.

Setting Preset StationsUp to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),can be programmed on the six numberedpushbuttons, by performing the following steps:


2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons for three seconds until youhear a beep. Whenever that pushbutton ispressed and released, the station that was setreturns.

5. Repeat the Steps 2-4 for each pushbutton.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

EQ (Equalization): To adjust the bass or treble,press the tune knob or EQ button until thedesired tone control label appears on the display.Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease the setting. The displayshows the current bass or treble level. If a station’sfrequency is weak, or if there is static, decreasethe treble.

223

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

` BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust thebalance or fade, press this button or the tune knobuntil the desired speaker control label appearson the display. Turn the tune knob clockwiseor counterclockwise to adjust the setting.

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCalibration Error appears on the display, it meansthat the radio has not been configured properlyfor your vehicle and it must be returned toyour dealer for service.

Loc (Locked): This message is displayed whenthe THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer.

Playing a CD (Single CD Player)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appears onthe radio display. As each new track starts toplay, the track number appears on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs andthe smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There may be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDsand DVDs on page 288 for more information.

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

224

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.

Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time, orattempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, youcould damage the CD player. When using theCD player, use only CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD at a time, andkeep the CD player and the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, and debris.

If an error appears on the display, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to ejectthe CD. If the CD is not removed, after severalseconds, the CD automatically pulls back into theplayer.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on theCD currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow togo to the start of the current track, if more thanten seconds have played. Press the right SEEKarrow to go to the next track. If either SEEK arrow isheld or pressed multiple times, the player continuesmoving backward or forward through the CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within a track. You willhear sound at a reduced volume. Release thispushbutton to resume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track appears on the display.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and holdthis pushbutton to advance playback quickly withina track. You will hear sound at a reducedvolume. Release this pushbutton to resume playingthe track. The elapsed time of the track appearson the display.

225

RDM (Random): With random, you can listen toCD tracks in random, rather than sequentialorder. To use random, do the following:

1. Press this button to play tracks from the CDyou are listening to in random order. Therandom icon appears on the display.

2. Press this button again to turn off randomplay. The random icon disappears from thedisplay.

RPT (Repeat): With repeat one track can berepeated (played over and over).

• To repeat the track you are listening to, pressand release the RPT button. An arrow symbolappears on the display. Press RPT againto turn off repeat play. When repeat is off, thearrow symbol is no longer displayed.

4 (Information): Press this button to switch thedisplay between the track number, elapsed time ofthe track, and the time. When the ignition is off,press this button to display the time.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The CD remains safelyinside the radio for future listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD when listening to the radio. The CD iconand track number appears on the display when aCD is in the player. Press this button againand the system automatically searches for anauxiliary input device such as a portable audioplayer.

226

CD Messages

CHECK DISC: If an error message appears onthe display and/or the CD comes out, it couldbe for one of the following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hourand try again.

• There may have been a problem while burningthe CD-R.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it downand provide it to your dealer when reporting theproblem.

Using the Auxiliary Input JackYour radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output; do not plug theheadphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.You can however, connect an external audiodevice such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3player, CD changer, or cassette tape player, etc. tothe auxiliary input jack for use as another sourcefor audio listening.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is in park (P). SeeDefensive Driving on page 290 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliaryinput jack. When a device is connected, press theradio CD/AUX button to begin playing audiofrom the device over the vehicle speakers.

227

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume of the portable player. You may need todo additional volume adjustments from the portabledevice if the volume does not go loud or softenough.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a portable audio device is playing. Theportable audio device continues playing, so youmay want to stop it or power it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD when a portable audio device is playing.Press this button again and the system beginsplaying audio from the connected portable audioplayer. If a portable audio player is notconnected, “No Aux” appears on the display.

Radio with CD (MP3)

Radio with CD (MP3) shown, Radio with Six-Disc CD(MP3) similar

228

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).The RDS feature is available for use only on FMstations that broadcast RDS information. Thissystem relies upon receiving specific informationfrom these stations and only works when theinformation is available. While the radio is tuned toan FM-RDS station, the station name or call lettersappear on the display. In rare cases, a radio stationmay broadcast incorrect information that causes theradio features to work improperly. If this happens,contact the radio station.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based inthe 48 contiguous United States and Canada.XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coastchannels including music, news, sports, talk,traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’sprogramming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information that includes song titleand artist name. A service fee is required inorder to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™; In the U.S. atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

Playing the Radio


Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the volume.

Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radiois also equipped with Speed CompensatedVolume (SCV). When SCV is on, the radio volumeautomatically adjusts to compensate for road andwind noise as you speed up or slow down whiledriving. That way, the volume level should soundabout the same as you drive. To activate SCV:1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.2. Press the MENU button to display the radio

setup menu.3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO

VOLUM (volume) label on the radio display.4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed

Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med(medium), or High) to select the level of radiovolume compensation. The display times outafter approximately 10 seconds. Each highersetting allows for more radio volumecompensation at faster vehicle speeds.

229

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between AM,FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The display showsthe selection.





4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,MP3, and RDS Features): Press the informationbutton to display additional text informationrelated to the current FM-RDS or XM™ station, orMP3 song. A choice of additional informationsuch as: Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT(category) may appear. Continue pressing theinformation button to highlight the desired label, orpress the pushbutton positioned under any oneof the labels and the information about thatlabel appears on the display.

When information is not available, No Info appearson the display.

230

Storing a Radio Station as a FavoriteDrivers are encouraged to set up their radio stationfavorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune toyour favorite stations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls (if equipped).See Defensive Driving on page 290.

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations canbe programmed as favorites using thesix pushbuttons positioned below the radio stationfrequency labels and by using the radio favoritespage button (FAV button). Press the FAV button togo through up to six pages of favorites, eachhaving six favorite stations available per page.Each page of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped)stations. To store a station as a favorite, performthe following steps:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press the FAV button to display the pagewhere you want the station stored.

3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttonsuntil you hear a beep. Whenever thatpushbutton is pressed and released, thestation that was set will return.

4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radiostation you want stored as a favorite.

The number of favorites pages can be setup usingthe MENU button. To setup the number offavorites pages, perform the following steps:

1. Press the MENU button to display the radiosetup menu.

2. Press the pushbutton located below theFAV 1-6 label.

3. Select the desired number of favorites pagesby pressing the pushbutton located below thedisplayed page numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu timeout, to return to the original main radioscreen showing the radio station frequencylabels and to begin the process ofprogramming your favorites for the chosenamount of numbered pages.

231


BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, orTreble): To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, pressthe tune knob until the tone control labels appear onthe display. Continue pressing to highlight thedesired label, or press the pushbutton positionedunder the desired label. Turn the tune knobclockwise or counterclockwise to adjust thehighlighted setting. You can also adjust thehighlighted setting by pressing either the SEEK,FWD (forward) or REV (reverse) button until thedesired levels are obtained. If a station’s frequencyis weak, or if there is static, decrease the treble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to themiddle position, press the pushbutton positionedunder the BASS, MID, or TREB label for more thantwo seconds. A beep will sound and the leveladjusts to the middle position.

To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls tothe middle position, press the tune knob for morethan two seconds until you hear a beep.

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to selectpreset equalization settings.

To return to the manual mode, press the EQbutton until Manual appears on the display or startto manually adjust the bass, midrange, or trebleby pressing the tune knob.


BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balanceor fade, press the tune knob until the speakercontrol labels appear on the display. Continuepressing to highlight the desired label, or press thepushbutton positioned under the desired label.Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto adjust the highlighted setting. You can alsoadjust the highlighted setting by pressing either theSEEK, FWD, or REV button until the desiredlevels are obtained.

To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middleposition, press the pushbutton positioned under theBAL or FADE label for more than two seconds.A beep will sound and the level adjusts tothe middle position.

To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls tothe middle position, press the tune knob formore than two seconds until you hear a beep.

232

Finding a Category (CAT) Station

CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to findXM™ stations when the radio is in the XM™mode. To find XM™ channels within a desiredcategory, perform the following:

1. Press the BAND button until the XM™frequency is displayed. Press the CAT buttonto display the category labels on the radiodisplay. Continue pressing the CAT buttonuntil the desired category name is displayed.

2. Press either of the two buttons below thedesired category label to immediately tuneto the first XM™ station associated with thatcategory.

3. Turn the tune knob, press the buttons belowthe right or left arrows displayed, or press theright or left SEEK buttons to go to the nextor previous XM™ station within the selectedcategory.

4. To exit the category search mode, press theFAV button or BAND button to display yourfavorites again.

Undesired XM™ categories can be removedthrough the setup menu. To remove an undesiredcategory, perform the following:


2. Press the pushbutton located below the XMCAT label.

3. Turn the tune knob to display the categoryyou want removed.

4. Press the pushbutton located under theRemove label until the category namealong with the word Removed appears on thedisplay.

5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.

Removed categories can be restored by pressingthe pushbutton under the Add label when aremoved category is displayed or by pressing thepushbutton under the Restore All label.

The radio does not allow you to remove or addcategories while the vehicle is moving faster than5 MPH (8 km/h).

233

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCalibration Error appears on the display, it meansthat the radio has not been configured properlyfor your vehicle and it must be returned toyour dealer for service.

Locked: This message is displayed when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up theradio. Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an errorcannot be corrected, contact your dealer.

Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 272 later in thissection for further detail.

Playing a CD (Single CD Player)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying.

Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)

LOAD ^: Press this button to load CDs into theCD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.

To insert one CD, do the following:

1. Press and release the load button.

2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.

3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls the CD in.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Press and hold the load button fortwo seconds. A beep will sound andLoad All Discs appears on the display.

2. Follow the displayed instruction on when toinsert the discs. The CD player takes up tosix CDs.

3. Press the Load button again to cancel loadingmore CDs.

If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

234

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appearson the CD. As each new track starts to play,the track number appears on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.



Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen instead.

Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time,or attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs,you could damage the CD player. Whenusing the CD player, use only CDs in goodcondition without any label, load one CD at atime, and keep the CD player and the loadingslot free of foreign materials, liquids, anddebris.


Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to ejectCD(s). To eject the CD that is currently playing,press and release this button. A beep willsound and Ejecting Disc appears on the display.Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc appears ondisplay. The CD can be removed. If the CD isnot removed, after several seconds, the CDautomatically pulls back into the player and beginsplaying.

For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold theeject button for two seconds to eject all discs.


235

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrowto go to the start of the current track, if more thanten seconds have played. Press the right SEEKarrow to go to the next track. If either SEEK arrowis held, or pressed multiple times, the playercontinues moving backward or forward through thetracks on the CD.


\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and holdthis button to advance playback quickly within atrack. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.Release this button to resume playing thetrack. The elapsed time of the track appears onthe display.

RDM (Random): With random, you can listen tothe tracks in random, rather than sequentialorder, on one CD or all CDs in a six-disc CDplayer. To use random, do one of the following:

• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a singleCD player, insert a disc partway into the slot ofthe CD player. A RDM label appears on thedisplay.To play the tracks from the single CD inrandom order, press the pushbutton positionedunder the RDM label until Random CurrentDisc is displayed. Press the pushbutton againto turn off random play.

• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a six-disc CDplayer, press and hold the LOAD button.A beep will sound and Load All Discs appearson the display. Insert one or more discspartway into the slot of the CD player.To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six-discCD player in random order, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM labeluntil Randomize All Discs is displayed.Press the same pushbutton again to turn offrandom play.

236


CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD when listening to the radio. The CD iconand a message showing disc and/or track numberappears on the display when a CD is in theplayer. Press this button again and the systemautomatically searches for an auxiliary inputdevice, such as a portable audio player. If aportable audio player is not connected, “No InputDevice Found” appears on the display.

Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R orCD-RW DiscIf you have a radio with a single CD (MP3) or asix-disc CD (MP3) player, it is capable of playingan MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc. For moreinformation on how to play an MP3 CD-R orCD-RW disc, see “Using an MP3” in the index.

CD Messages

CHECK DISC: If an error message appears onthe display and/or the CD comes out, it couldbe for one of the following reasons:





• There may have been a problem while burningthe CD.




237

Using the Auxiliary Input JackYour radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output; do not plug theheadphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.You can however, connect an external audiodevice such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3player, CD changer, or cassette tape player, etc. tothe auxiliary input jack for use as another sourcefor audio listening.


To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliaryinput jack. When a device is connected, press theradio CD/AUX button to begin playing audiofrom the device over the vehicle speakers.

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume of the portable player. You may need todo additional volume adjustments from the portabledevice if the volume does not go loud or softenough.


CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD when a portable audio device is playing.Press this button again and the system beginsplaying audio from the connected portable audioplayer. If a portable audio player is notconnected, “No Input Device Found” appears onthe display.

238

Radio with CD and DVD

If your vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) system, it has a CD/DVD radio. See RearSeat Entertainment System on page 274 formore information on the vehicle’s RSE system.

The DVD player is the top slot on the radiofaceplate. The player is capable of reading theDTS programmed DVD Audio or DVD Video media(DTS and DTS 2.0 are trademarks of DigitalTheater Systems Inc.).

Dolby® is manufactured under license fromDolby® Laboratories. Dolby® and the double-Dsymbol are trademarks of Dolby® Laboratories.

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System(RDS). The RDS feature is available for use onlyon FM stations that broadcast RDS information.This system relies upon receiving specificinformation from these stations and only workswhen the information is available. While the radiois tuned to an FM-RDS station, the stationname or call letters appear on the display. In rarecases, a radio station may broadcast incorrectinformation that causes the radio features to workimproperly. If this happens, contact the radiostation.

239

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based inthe 48 contiguous United States and Canada.XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coastchannels including music, news, sports, talk,traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’sprogramming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information that includes song titleand artist name. A service fee is required inorder to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™; In the U.S. atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

Playing the Radio


Turn this knob clockwise to increase orcounterclockwise to decrease the volume.

Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radiohas Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). WhileSCV is on, the radio volume automatically adjuststo compensate for road and wind noise as yourspeed changes while driving. That way, the volumelevel should sound about the same as youdrive. To activate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.


3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTOVOLUM (volume) label on the radio display.

4. Press the pushbutton under the desired SCVsetting (OFF, Low, Med (medium), or High) toselect the level of radio volume compensation.The display times out after approximately10 seconds. Each higher setting allowsfor more radio volume compensation at fastervehicle speeds.

240

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between AM,FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The display showsthe selection.





4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,MP3, and RDS Features): Press the informationbutton to display additional text informationrelated to the current FM-RDS or XM™ station, orMP3 song. A choice of additional informationsuch as: Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT(category) may appear. Continue pressing theinformation button to highlight the desired label, orpress the pushbutton positioned under any oneof the labels and the information about thatlabel appears on the display.

When information is not available, No Info appearson the display.

241

Storing a Radio Station as a FavoriteDrivers are encouraged to set up their radio stationfavorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune toyour favorite stations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls, if thevehicle has them. See Defensive Driving onpage 290.

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations canbe programmed as favorites using thesix pushbuttons positioned below the radio stationfrequency labels and by using the radio favoritespage button (FAV button). Press the FAV button togo through up to six pages of favorites, eachhaving six favorite stations available per page.Each page of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped)stations. To store a station as a favorite, performthe following steps:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press the FAV button to display the pagewhere you want the station stored.

3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttonsuntil you hear a beep. Whenever thatpushbutton is pressed and released, thestation that was set returns.

4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radiostation you want stored as a favorite.

The number of favorites pages can be setup usingthe MENU button. To setup the number offavorites pages, perform the following steps:


2. Press the pushbutton located below theFAV 1-6 label.

3. Select the desired number of favorites pagesby pressing the pushbutton located below thedisplayed page numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu timeout, to return to the original main radioscreen showing the radio station frequencylabels and to begin the process ofprogramming your favorites for the chosenamount of numbered pages.

242


BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, orTreble): To adjust bass, midrange, or treble,press the tune knob until the tone control labelsappear on the display. Continue pressing tohighlight the desired label, or press the pushbuttonpositioned under the desired label. Turn thetune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjustthe highlighted setting. If a station’s frequencyis weak, or if there is static, decrease the treble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble tothe middle position, press the pushbuttonpositioned under the BASS, MID, or TREB labelfor more than two seconds. A beep will sound andthe level adjusts to the middle position.

To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls tothe middle position, press the tune knob formore than two seconds until you hear a beep.

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to choosebass and treble equalization settings designedfor different types of music. Your choices are pop,rock, country, talk, jazz, and classical. SelectingMANUAL or changing bass or treble, returnsthe EQ to the manual bass and treble settings.

Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source.

If your radio is equipped with a Bose® audiosystem, your EQ settings are either MANUALor TALK.


BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balanceor fade, press the tune knob until the speakercontrol labels appear on the display. Pressthe pushbutton positioned under the desired label.Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto adjust the highlighted setting. You can alsoadjust the highlighted setting by pressing either theSEEK, FWD, or REV button until the desiredlevels are obtained.

To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middleposition, press the pushbutton positioned under theBAL or FADE label for more than two seconds.A beep will sound and the level adjusts tothe middle position.

To quickly adjust both the balance and fade to themiddle position at one time, press the tune knob formore than two seconds until you hear a beep.

243

Finding a Category (CAT) Station

CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to findXM™ stations when the radio is in the XM™mode. To find XM™ channels within a desiredcategory, perform the following:

1. Press the BAND button until the XM™frequency is displayed. Press the CAT buttonto display the category labels on the radiodisplay. Continue pressing the CAT buttonuntil the desired category name is displayed.Another way to navigate the category listis to press the REV button or the FWD button.

2. Press either of the two buttons belowthe desired category label to immediately tuneto the first XM™ station associated withthat category.

3. Turn the tune knob, press the buttons belowthe right or left arrows displayed, or press theright or left SEEK buttons to go to the nextor previous XM™ station within the selectedcategory.

4. To exit the category search mode, press theFAV button or BAND button to display yourfavorites again.

Undesired XM™ categories can be removedthrough the setup menu. To remove an undesiredcategory, perform the following:


2. Press the pushbutton located below the XMCAT label.

3. Turn the tune knob to display the categoryyou want removed.

4. Press the pushbutton located under theRemove label until the category namealong with the word Removed appears on thedisplay.

5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.

Removed categories can be restored by pressingthe pushbutton under the Add label when aremoved category is displayed or by pressing thepushbutton under the Restore All label.

The radio does not allow you to remove or addcategories while the vehicle is moving faster than5 mph (8 km/h).

244

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory.If Calibration Error appears on the display, itmeans that the radio has not been configuredproperly for your vehicle and it must be returnedto your dealer for service.

Locked: This message is displayed when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up theradio. Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an errorcannot be corrected, contact your dealer.

Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 272 later in thissection for further detail.

Playing a CD (In Either the DVD orCD Slot)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying (loading a disc into the system, dependingon media type and format ranges from5 to 20 seconds for a CD, and up to 30 secondsfor a DVD to begin playing).

If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD inthe player, it stays in the player. When the ignitionor radio is turned on, the CD starts playingwhere it stopped, if it was the last selected audiosource. The CD is controlled by the buttonson the radio faceplate. The DVD/CD decks, (upperslot is the DVD deck and the lower slot is theCD deck) of the radio are compatible with mostaudio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, and MP3s.

When a CD is inserted, the text label DVD or CDsymbol appears on the left side of the radiodisplay. As each new track starts to play, the tracknumber appears on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

245



Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time,or attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs,you could damage the CD player. Whenusing the CD player, use only CDs in goodcondition without any label, load one CD at atime, and keep the CD player and the loadingslot free of foreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a soft marker instead.


Z CD (Eject): Press and release the CD ejectbutton to eject the CD that is currently playingin the bottom slot. A beep will sound and EjectingDisc appears on the display. Once the disc isejected, Remove Disc appears on the display. TheCD can be removed. If the CD is not removed,after several seconds, the CD automatically pullsback into the player.

If loading and reading of a CD cannot becompleted, such as unknown format, etc., and thedisc fails to eject, press and hold the DVD ejectbutton for more than five seconds to force the discto eject.

246

Z DVD (Eject): Press and release the DVDeject button to eject the CD that is currently playingin the top slot. A beep will sound and EjectingDisc appears on the display. Once the discis ejected, Remove Disc appears on the display.The CD can be removed. If the CD is not removed,after several seconds, the CD automaticallypulls back into the player.



© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go tothe start of the current track, if more thanfive seconds have played. If less than five secondshave played, the previous track plays. Press theright SEEK arrow to go to the next track. Ifeither SEEK arrow is held, or pressed multipletimes, the player continues moving backward orforward through the tracks on the CD.


\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and holdthis button to advance playback quickly within atrack. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.Release this button to resume playing thetrack. The elapsed time of the track appears onthe display.

RDM (Random): With random, you can listen tothe tracks in random, rather than sequentialorder. To play the tracks from the CD, press theDVD/CD AUX button when not sourced to the CD,or insert a disc partway into the slot. A RDMlabel appears on the display. Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the RDM label until RandomCurrent Disc appears on the display. Pressthe pushbutton again to turn off random play.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD or DVD is playing. The CD orDVD remains safely inside the radio for futurelistening or viewing entertainment.

247

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button tocycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listeningto the radio. The DVD/CD text label and amessage showing track or chapter numberappears on the display when a disc is in eitherslot. Press this button again and the systemautomatically searches for an auxiliary inputdevice, such as a portable audio player. Ifa portable audio player is not connected, “No AuxInput Device” appears on the display. If a discis in both the DVD slot and the CD slot theDVD/CD AUX button cycles between thetwo sources and does not indicate “No Aux InputDevice”. If a front auxiliary device is connected,the DVD/CD AUX button cycles through allavailable options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot,Front AUX, and Rear AUX (if available). See“Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in thissection, or Rear Seat Entertainment Systemon page 274, “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” for moreinformation.

If a disc is inserted into top DVD slot, the rearseat operator can turn on the video screenand use the remote control to navigate the CD(tracks only) through the remote control.

Audio OutputOnly one audio source can be heard through thespeakers at one time. An audio source isdefined as DVD slot, CD slot, XM™, FM/AM,Front Aux Jack, or Rear Aux Jack.

Press the power button to turn the radio on. Theradio can be heard through all of the vehiclespeakers.

Front seat passengers can listen to the radio (AM,FM, or XM) by pressing the BAND button or theDVD/CD AUX button to select CD slot, DVDslot, front or rear auxiliary input (if available).

If a playback device is plugged into the radio’sfront auxiliary input jack or the rear auxiliary jack,the front seat passengers is able to listen toplayback from this source through the vehiclespeakers. See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)”later in this section, or Rear Seat EntertainmentSystem on page 274, “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” formore information.

248

Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R orCD-RW DiscIf you have a radio with a CD and DVD, it iscapable of playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RWdisc. For more information on how to play anMP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc, see “Using an MP3” inthe index.

CD MessagesIf these messages appear on the display and/orthe CD comes out, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:

Optical Error: If the disc was insertedupside down.

Disk Read Error: If a disc was inserted with aninvalid or unknown format.

Player Error: If there are disc LOAD or discEJECT problems.





• There may have been a problem while burningthe CD.




249

Using the DVD PlayerThe DVD player is controlled by the buttons onthe remote control, by the RSA system, or by thebuttons on the radio faceplate. See “RemoteControl”, under Rear Seat Entertainment Systemon page 274 for more information.

The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs ofthe appropriate region code that is printed onthe jacket of most DVDs.

The DVD slot of the radio is compatible with mostaudio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video,DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW media alongwith MP3 and WMA formats.

If an error message appears on the video screenor the radio, see “DVD Display Error Messages”under, Rear Seat Entertainment System onpage 274 and “DVD Radio Error Messages” in thissection for more information.

Playing a DVD

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button tocycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listeningto the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a messageshowing track or chapter number appears on thedisplay when a disc is in either slot. Press thisbutton again and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary input device, such as aportable audio player. If a portable audio player isnot connected, “No Aux Input Device” appears onthe display. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and theCD slot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles betweenthe two sources and does not indicate “No AuxInput Device”. If a front auxiliary device isconnected, the DVD/CD AUX button cycles throughall available options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot,Front AUX, and Rear AUX (if available). See “Usingthe Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this section, orRear Seat Entertainment System on page 274,“Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” for more information.

250

O (Power): Press this knob to turn the radio on.Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the volume. A singlepress turns the radio off. Press and holding theknob for more than two seconds turns off the entireradio and rear seat entertainment system andstarts the parental control feature which preventsthe rear seat occupant from operating the RearSeat Audio (RSA) system or remote control.

A lock symbol appears next to the clock display.The parental control feature remains on untila subsequent press and hold of the power buttonis performed (more than two seconds), or untilthe driver turns the ignition off and exits thevehicle.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to change tracks on aCD or DVD, to manually tune a radio station, or tochange clock or date settings, while in the clockor date setting mode. See the informationgiven earlier in this section specific to the radio,CD, and the DVD. Also, see Setting the Time(Without Date Display) on page 220 or Setting theTime (With Date Display) on page 220, forsetting the clock and date.

© SEEK (Previous Track/Chapter): Press thisbutton to return to the start of the current trackor chapter. Press this button again to go tothe previous track or chapter. This button may notwork when the DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

SEEK ¨ (Next Track/Chapter): Press thisbutton to go to the next track or chapter. Thisbutton may not work when the DVD is playing thecopyright information or the previews.

s REV (Reverse): Press this button to fastreverse the CD or DVD, five times the normalspeed. The radio displays the elapsed time whilein fast reverse. To stop fast reversing, pressthis button again. This button may not work whenthe DVD is playing the copyright information orthe previews.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press this button tofast forward the CD or DVD. The radio displays theelapsed time and fast forwards five times thenormal speed. To stop fast forwarding, press thisbutton again. This button may not work whenthe DVD is playing the copyright information or thepreviews.

251

Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD orDVD. If a CD or DVD is ejected, but not removed,the player automatically pulls it back in after15 seconds.

If loading and reading of a CD cannot becompleted, such as unknown format, etc., and thedisc fails to eject, press and hold the CD ejectbutton for more than five seconds to force the discto eject.

DVD-V (Video) Display ButtonsOnce a DVD-V is inserted, the radio display menushows several tag options for DVD playing.Press the pushbuttons located under any desiredtag option during DVD playback. See the tagoptions listed below for more information.

The rear seat passenger navigates the DVD-Vmenus and controls through the remote control.See “Remote Control”, under Rear SeatEntertainment System on page 274 for moreinformation. The Video Screen automatically turnson when the DVD-V is inserted into the DVD slot.

r /j (Play/Pause): Press either the play orpause icon displayed on the radio system,to toggle between pausing or restarting playbackof a DVD. If the forward arrow is showing ondisplay, the system is in pause mode. If the pauseicon is showing on display, the system is inplayback mode. If the DVD screen is off, press theplay button to turn the screen on.

Some DVDs begin playing after the previews havefinished, although there may be a delay of up to30 seconds. If the DVD does not begin playing themovie automatically, press the pushbuttonlocated under the play/pause symbol tag displayedon the radio. If the DVD still does not play, referto the on-screen instructions, if available.

c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD.

r (Enter): Press this button to select thechoices that are highlighted in any menu.

252

y (Menu): Press this button to access the DVDmenu. The DVD menu is different on everyDVD. Use the pushbuttons located under thenavigation arrows to navigate the cursor throughthe DVD menu. After making a selection press theenter button. This button only operates whenusing a DVD.

Nav (Navigate): Press this button to displaydirectional arrows for navigating through themenus.

q (Return): Press this button to exit the currentactive menu and return to the previous menu.This button operates only when a DVD is playingand a menu is active.

DVD-A (Audio) Display ButtonsOnce a DVD-A is inserted, a radio display menushows several tag options for DVD playing.Press the pushbuttons located under any desiredtag option during DVD playback. See the tagoptions listed below for more information.

The rear seat operator navigates the DVD-Amenus and controls through the remote control.See “Remote Control”, under Rear SeatEntertainment System on page 274 for moreinformation. The Video Screen does notautomatically power on when the DVD-A isinserted into the DVD slot. It must be manuallyturned on by the rear seat occupant throughthe remote control power button.

253

r /j (Play/Pause): Press either the play orpause icon displayed on the radio system,to toggle between pausing or restarting playbackof a DVD. If the forward arrow is showing ondisplay, the system is in pause mode. If the pauseicon is showing on display, the system is inplayback mode.

q Group r: Press this button to cycle throughmusical groupings on the DVD-A disc.

Nav (Navigate): Press this button to displaydirectional arrows for navigating through themenus.

e (Audio Stream): Press this button to cyclethrough audio steam formats located on DVD-Adisc. There is not any type of notification forthe customer to see through the radio display, butVSM has a text field that shows audio streamchanging.

Inserting a DiscTo play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the labelside up, into the loading slot. The DVD playermay not accept some paper labeled media. Theplayer starts loading the disc into the systemand display “Loading Disc” on the radio display.At the same time, the radio displays a softkeymenu of option(s). Some discs automatically playthe movie while others default to the softkeymenu display which requires the Play, Enter, orNavigation softkeys to be pressed (either bysoftkey or by the rear seat passenger using theremote control).

Loading a disc into the system, depending onmedia type and format, ranges from5 to 20 seconds for a CD, and up to 30 secondsfor a DVD.

254

Stopping and Resuming PlaybackTo stop playing a DVD without turning off thesystem, press the stop button on the remotecontrol, or press the pushbutton located under thestop or the play/pause symbol tags displayedon the radio. If the radio head is sourced tosomething other than DVD-V, press the DVD/CDAUX button to make DVD-V the active source.

To resume DVD playback, press the play/pausebutton on the remote control, or press thepushbutton located under the play/pause symboltag displayed on the radio. The DVD should resumeplay from where it last stopped if the disc has notbeen ejected and the stop button has not beenpressed twice on the remote control. If the disc hasbeen ejected or the stop button has been pressedtwice on the remote control, the disc resumesplaying at the beginning of the disc.

Ejecting a DiscPress the eject button on the radio to eject thedisc. If a disc is ejected from the radio, butnot removed, the radio reloads the disc after ashort period of time. The disc is stored in the radio.The radio does not resume play of the discautomatically. If the RSA system is sourced to theDVD, the movie when reloaded into the DVDplayer begins to play again. In case loading andreading of a DVD or CD cannot be completed(unknown format, etc.), and the disc fails to eject,press and hold the DVD Eject button morethan 5 seconds to force the disc to eject.

DVD Radio Error MessagesPlayer Error: This message is displayed whenthere are disc load or eject problems.

Disc Format Error: This message appears onthe display, if the disc is inserted with the disc labelwrong side up, or if the disc is damaged.

Disc Region Error: This message appears onthe display, if the disc is not from a correct region.

No Disc Inserted: This message appears on thedisplay, if no disc is present when the EJECT orDVD/CD AUX button is pressed on the radio.

255

Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)Your radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output; do not plug theheadphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.You can however, connect an external audiodevice such as an iPod, laptop computer,MP3 player, CD player, or cassette tape player,etc. to the auxiliary input jack for use as anothersource for audio listening.


To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliaryinput jack. When a device is connected, the radioautomatically begins playing audio from thedevice over the vehicle speakers.

To listen to a device through the rear auxiliaryinput over the speakers, cycle the DVD/CD Auxbutton on the radio faceplate until “Rear Aux Input”displays on the radio. The RSA or DVD Screenmust be on in order for the radio to source to rearauxiliary.

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume of the portable player. You may need todo additional volume adjustments from the portabledevice.


256

DVD/CD AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button tocycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary whenlistening to the radio. The DVD/CD text label anda message showing track or chapter numberappears on display when a disc is in either slot.Press this button again and the systemautomatically searches for an auxiliary inputdevice, such as a portable audio player. If aportable audio player is not connected, “No AuxInput Device” appears on the display. If a disc is inboth the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD/CDAUX button cycles between the two sourcesand does not indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If afront auxiliary device is connected, theDVD/CD AUX button cycles through all availableoptions, such as: DVD slot, CD slot, FrontAUX, and Rear AUX (if available). See “Using theAuxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this section, orRear Seat Entertainment System on page 274,“Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” for more information.

Using an MP3 (Radio with CD orSix-Disc CD Player)

MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW DiscThe radio plays MP3 and WMA files that wererecorded on a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files canbe recorded with the following fixed bit rates:32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps,96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps,224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variablebit rate. Song title, artist name, and albumare displayed by the radio when recorded usingID3 tags version 1 and 2.

Compressed AudioThe radio also plays discs that contain bothuncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) andMP3/WMA files. By default the radio reads onlythe uncompressed audio and ignores theMP3/WMA files. Pressing the CAT (category)button toggles between compressed anduncompressed audio format.

257

MP3/WMA FormatIf you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on apersonal computer:

• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on aCD-R or CD-RW disc.

• Avoid mixing standard audio and MP3 files onone disc.

• The CD player is able to read and play amaximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and255 files.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy tofind songs while driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for each album.Each folder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

• Avoid subfolders. The system can support upto 8 subfolders deep, however, keep the totalnumber of folders to a minimum in order toreduce the complexity and confusion in tryingto locate a particular folder during playback.

• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wplextension (other file extensions may not work).

• Minimize the length of the file, folder, orplaylist names. Long file, folder, or playlistnames, or a combination of a large number offiles and folders, or playlists may cause theplayer to be unable to play up to the maximumnumber of files, folders, playlists, or sessions.If you wish to play a large number of files,folders, playlists, or sessions, minimizethe length of the file, folder, or playlist name.Long names also take up more space onthe display and might not fully display.

• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it.Trying to add music to an existing discmay cause the disc not to function in theplayer.

Change playlists by using the previous and nextfolder buttons, the tuner knob, or the seek buttons.An MP3 CD-R that was recorded using no filefolders can also be played. If a CD-R containsmore than the maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists,and 255 files, the player lets you access andnavigate up to the maximum, but all items overthe maximum are not accessible.

258

Root DirectoryThe root directory of the CD-R is treated as afolder. If the root directory has compressed audiofiles, the directory displays as F1 ROOT. Allfiles contained directly under the root directory areaccessed prior to any root directory folders.However, playlists (Px) are always accessedbefore root folders or files.

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewherein the file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advances to the nextfolder in the file structure that contains compressedaudio files. The empty folder does not display.

No FolderWhen the CD-R contains only compressed files,the files are located under the root folder. The nextand previous folder functions are not displayedon a CD-R that was recorded without foldersor playlists. When displaying the name of the folderthe radio displays ROOT.

When the CD-R contains only playlists andcompressed audio files, but no folders, all files arelocated under the root folder. The folder down andthe folder up buttons search playlists (Px) first andthen go to the root folder. When the radio displaysthe name of the folder, the radio displays ROOT.

Order of PlayTracks recorded to the CD-R are played in thefollowing order:

• Play begins from the first track in the firstplaylist and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each playlist. When the last trackof the last playlist has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first playlist.

• Play begins from the first track in the firstfolder and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each folder. When the last track ofthe last folder has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, the display does notautomatically show the new folder name unless thefolder mode was chosen as the default display. Thenew track name appears on the display.

259

File System and NamingThe song name that displays is the song name thatis contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays thefile name without the extension (such as .mp3) asthe track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters orfour pages are shortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extension of the filenamedisplays.

Preprogrammed PlaylistsPreprogrammed playlists that were created usingWinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however, they cannotbe edited using the radio. These playlists aretreated as special folders containing compressedaudio song files.

Playing an MP3Insert a CD-R partway into the slot (Single CDPlayer), or press the load button and wait for themessage to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player),label side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-Rshould begin playing.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R inthe player, it stays in the player. When theignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R starts toplay where it stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

As each new track starts to play, the track numberand song title appears on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CD-Rs with an adapter ring. Full-sizeCD-Rs and the smaller CD-Rs are loaded in thesame manner.



260

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.



Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to ejectCD-R(s). To eject the CD-R that is currently playing,press and release this button. A beep will soundand Ejecting Disc appears on the display. Once thedisc is ejected, Remove Disc appears on thedisplay. The CD-R can be removed. If the CD-R isnot removed, after several seconds, the CD-Rautomatically pulls back into the player and beginsplaying. For the Six-Disc CD player, press and holdthe eject button for two seconds to eject all discs.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files onthe CD-R currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go tothe start of the current MP3 file, if more thanten seconds have played. Press the right SEEKarrow to go to the next MP3 file. If eitherSEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple times, theplayer continues moving backward or forwardthrough MP3 files on the CD.

S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to the firsttrack in the next folder.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file. Youwill hear sound at a reduced volume. Releasethis button to resume playing the file. The elapsedtime of the file appears on the display.

261

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within anMP3 file. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.Release this button to resume playing the file.The elapsed time of the file appears on thedisplay.

RDM (Random): With random, you can listen toMP3 files on the CD-R in random, rather thansequential order, on one CD-R or all discsin a six-disc CD player. To use random, do one ofthe following:

1. To play MP3 files from the CD-R you arelistening to in random order, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM labeluntil Random Current Disc displays. Press thesame pushbutton again to turn off random play.

2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-discCD player in random order, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM labeluntil Randomize All Discs displays. Press thesame pushbutton again to turn off random play.

h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigatorfeature to play MP3 files on the CD-R in orderby artist or album. Press the pushbutton locatedbelow the music navigator label. The player scansthe disc to sort the files by artist and albumID3 tag information. It may take several minutes toscan the disc depending on the number of MP3files recorded to the CD-R. The radio maybegin playing while it is scanning the disc in thebackground. When the scan is finished, the CD-Rbegins playing again.

Once the disc has been scanned, the playerdefaults to playing MP3 files in order by artist. Thecurrent artist playing is shown on the secondline of the display between the arrows. Once allsongs by that artist are played, the playermoves to the next artist in alphabetical order onthe CD-R and begins playing MP3 files bythat artist. If you want to listen to MP3 files byanother artist, press the pushbutton located beloweither arrow button. The CD goes to the next orprevious artist in alphabetical order. Continuepressing either button until the desired artistdisplays.

262

To change from playback by artist to playback byalbum, press the pushbutton located below theSort By label. From the sort screen, push one ofthe buttons below the album button. Press thepushbutton below the back label to return to themain music navigator screen. Now the albumname is displayed on the second line between thearrows and songs from the current album beginsto play. Once all songs from that album are played,the player moves to the next album in alphabeticalorder on the CD-R and begin playing MP3 filesfrom that album.

To exit music navigator mode, press thepushbutton below the Back label to return tonormal MP3 playback.


CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD when listening to the radio. The CD iconand a message showing disc and/or track numberappears on the display when a CD is in theplayer. Press this button again and the systemautomatically searches for an auxiliary input devicesuch as a portable audio player. If a portableaudio player is not connected, “No Input DeviceFound” appears on the display.

263

Using an MP3 (Radio with CD andDVD Player)

MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW DiscCompressed Audio or Mixed Mode DiscsThe radio also plays discs that contain bothuncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) andMP3/WMA files depending on which slot the discis loaded into. By default the radio reads onlythe uncompressed audio (.CDA) and ignores theMP3/WMA files on the DVD deck. On the CDdeck, pressing the CAT (category) button togglesbetween compressed and uncompressed audioformat, the default being the uncompressedformat (.CDA).

MP3/WMA FormatIf you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on apersonal computer:

• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on aCD-R or CD-RW disc.

• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files onone disc.

• The CD player (lower slot) is able to read andplay a maximum combination of 512 files andfolders. The DVD player (upper slot) is able toread 255 folders, 15 playlists and 40 sessions.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy tofind songs while driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for each album.Each folder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

264

• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to8 subfolders deep, however, keep the totalnumber of folders to a minimum in order toreduce the complexity and confusion in trying tolocate a particular folder during playback.

• Make sure playlists have a .m3u, .wpl or .plsextension (other file extensions may not work).

• Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlistnames. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or acombination of a large number of files andfolders, or playlists may cause the player to beunable to play up to the maximum number offiles, folders, playlists, or sessions. If you wishto play a large number of files, folders, playlists,or sessions, minimize the length of the file,folder or playlist name. Long names also takeup more space on the display.

• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it.Trying to add music to an existing disc cancause the disc not to function in the player.

Root DirectoryThe root directory of the CD-R is treated as afolder. If the root directory has compressed audiofiles, the directory is displayed as F1 ROOT.All files contained directly under the root directoryare accessed prior to any root directory folders.However, playlists (Px) are always accessedbefore root folders or files.

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewherein the file structure that contains onlyfolders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advances to the nextfolder in the file structure that contains compressedaudio files. The empty folder does not display.

265

No FolderWhen the CD-R contains only compressed files,the files are located under the root folder. The nextand previous folder functions are not displayedon a CD-R that was recorded without foldersor playlists. When displaying the name of the folderthe radio displays ROOT.

When the CD-R contains only playlists andcompressed audio files, but no folders, all files arelocated under the root folder. The folder down andthe folder up buttons search playlists (Px) first andthen go to the root folder. When the radio displaysthe name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.

Order of Play• Play begins from the first track in the first

playlist and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each playlist. When the last trackof the last playlist has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first playlist.

• Play begins from the first track in the firstfolder and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each folder. When the last track ofthe last folder has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, the display doesnot automatically show the new folder name unlessyou have chosen the folder mode as the defaultdisplay. The new track name appears on thedisplay.

File System and NamingThe song name that displays is the song name thatis contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays thefile name without the extension (such as .mp3) asthe track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters orfour pages are shortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extension of the filenamedoes not display.

Preprogrammed PlaylistsPreprogrammed playlists that were created usingWinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however, they cannotbe edited using the radio. These playlists aretreated as special folders containing compressedaudio song files.

266

Playing an MP3 (In Either the DVD orCD Slot)Insert a CD-R partway into either the top orbottom slot, label side up. The player pulls it in,and the CD-R should begin playing.

Depending on the format of the disc, a softkeymenu appears and allow navigation of thedisc. The menu reads left to right as RDM(Randomize song play order), a Folder icon withleft and right arrows (to move up or downthrough available folders), a PL tag if the disc hasa Playlist available, and a Music Navigator tag.If a Playlist tag is shown, toggling this key bringsup a Folder softkey only or the menu aspreviously described.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R inthe player, it stays in the player. When theignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R starts toplay where it stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

As each new track starts to play, the track numberand song title appears on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CD-Rs with an adapter ring. Full-sizeCD-Rs and the smaller CD-Rs are loaded in thesame manner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There may be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD does not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDsand DVDs on page 288 for more information.

267



Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a soft marker instead.


Z CD (Eject): Press and release the CD ejectbutton to eject the CD-R that is currentlyplaying in the bottom slot. A beep will sound andEjecting Disc appears on the display. Oncethe disc is ejected, Remove Disc appears on thedisplay. The CD-R can be removed. If theCD-R is not removed, after several seconds, theCD-R automatically pulls back into the player.


268

Z DVD (Eject): Press and release the DVDeject button to eject the CD-R that is currentlyplaying in the top slot. A beep will soundand Ejecting Disc appears on the display. Oncethe disc is ejected, Remove Disc appears onthe display. The CD-R can be removed. Ifthe CD-R is not removed, after several seconds,the CD-R automatically pulls back into theplayer. If loading and reading of a CD cannot becompleted, such as unknown format, etc., andthe disc fails to eject, press and hold the DVD ejectbutton for more than five seconds to force thedisc to eject.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files onthe CD-R currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go tothe start of the current MP3 file, if more thanfive seconds have played. If less than five secondshave played, the previous MP3 file plays. Pressthe right SEEK arrow to go to the next MP3 file.If either SEEK arrow is held, or pressed multipletimes, the player continues moving backwardor forward through the MP3 files on the CD.

S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to the firsttrack in the next folder.

269

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file. Youwill hear sound at a reduced volume. Releasethis button to resume playing the file. The elapsedtime of the file appears on the display.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within an MP3file. You will hear sound at a reduced volume.Release this button to resume playing the file. Theelapsed time of the file appears on the display.

RDM (Random): With random, you can listen toMP3 files on the CD-R in random, rather thansequential order. To play MP3 files from the CD-Ryou are listening to in random order, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM label untilRandom Current Disc displays. Press thesame pushbutton again to turn off random play.

h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigatorfeature to play MP3 files on the CD-R in orderby artist or album. Press the pushbutton locatedbelow the music navigator label. The player scansthe disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3tag information. It can take several minutes to scanthe disc depending on the number of MP3 filesrecorded to the CD-R.

To cancel music navigator while the player isscanning, press the pushbutton located below themusic navigator label or eject the disc.

The radio may begin playing while it is scanningthe disc in the background. When the scan isfinished, the CD-R begins playing again.

Once the disc has been scanned, the playerdefaults to playing MP3 files in order by artist. Thecurrent artist playing is shown on the secondline of the display between the arrows. If you wantto listen to MP3 files by another artist, press thepushbutton located below either arrow button. Youwill go to the next or previous artist in alphabeticalorder. Continue pressing either button until thedesired artist is displayed.

270

To change from playback by artist to playback byalbum, press the pushbutton located below the SortBy label. From the sort screen, push one of thebuttons below the album button. Press thepushbutton below the back label to return to themain music navigator screen. The album namedisplays on the second line between the arrows andsongs from the current album begins to play. Onceall songs from that album are played, the playermoves to the next album in alphabetical order onthe CD-R and begins playing MP3 files from thatalbum.

To exit music navigator mode, press thepushbutton below the Back label to return to normalMP3 playback.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD or a DVD is playing. The CD or DVDremains safely inside the radio for futurelistening or viewing entertainment.

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button tocycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listeningto the radio. The DVD/CD text label and amessage showing track or chapter numberappears on display when a disc is in either slot.

Press this button again and the systemautomatically searches for an auxiliary inputdevice, such as a portable audio player. If aportable audio player is not connected, “No AuxInput Device” appears on the display. If a disc is inboth the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD/CDAUX button cycles between the two sourcesand does not indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If afront auxiliary device is connected, theDVD/CD AUX button cycles through all availableoptions, such as: DVD slot, CD slot, FrontAUX, and Rear AUX (if available). See “Using theAuxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this section, orRear Seat Entertainment System on page 274Rear Seat Entertainment System, “Audio/Video(A/V) Jacks” for more information.

If a MP3 is inserted into top DVD slot, the rearseat operator can turn on the video screenand use the remote control to navigate the CD(tracks only) through the remote control.

271

XM Radio Messages

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

XM Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No XM Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you moveinto an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after four second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.

Channel Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to anotherchannel.

Channel Unavail Channel no longeravailable

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Artist Info Artist Name/Featurenot available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.

No Title Info Song/Program Titlenot available

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

272

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

No CAT Info Category Namenot available

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Information No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. The system is working properly.

CAT Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM Theftlocked Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously beenin another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receiverscannot be swapped between vehicles. If this messageappears after having your vehicle serviced, check with yourdealer.

XM Radio ID Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with theXM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is neededto activate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, theremay be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.

Check XM Receivr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

XM Not Available XM™ Not Available If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

273

Navigation/Radio SystemYour vehicle may have a navigation radio system.

The navigation system has built-in featuresintended to minimize driver distraction. Technologyalone, no matter how advanced, can neverreplace your own judgment. See the NavigationSystem manual for some tips to help youreduce distractions while driving.

Rear Seat Entertainment SystemYour vehicle may have a DVD Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) system. The RSE systemworks with the vehicle’s audio system. TheDVD player is part of the front radio. The RSEsystem includes a radio with a DVD player, a videodisplay screen, audio/video jacks, two wirelessheadphones, and a remote control. See Radio withCD and DVD on page 239 for more informationon the vehicle’s audio/DVD system.

Before You DriveThe RSE is designed for rear seat passengersonly. The driver cannot safely view the videoscreen while driving and should not try to do so.

In severe or extreme weather conditions the RSEsystem may or may not work until the temperatureis within the operating range. The operating rangefor the RSE system is above −4°F (−20°C) or below140°F (60°C). If the temperature of your vehicle isoutside of this range, heat or cool the vehicle untilthe temperature is within the operating range of theRSE system.

Parental ControlThe Rear Seat Entertainment System may have aParental Control feature, depending on whichradio you have. The Parental Control feature willturn off the video screen and disable all buttonoperations from the remote control. This featurecan also be used to gain the attention of therear passengers that are using headphones.

274

To enable Parental Control press and hold theradio power button for more than 2 seconds. If on,the radio and video screen will turn off. If aDVD and/or CD is playing, it will be stopped.A “padlock” icon or a text message may bedisplayed on the radio display depending on whichradio you have, while Parental Control is on.The radio can be turned back on with a singlepress of the power button and used normally, butthe RSE system will remain in Parental Control.

To turn off Parental Control, press and holdthe radio power button for more than 2 seconds.The video screen will return to the state they werein before Parental Control was turned on. The“padlock” icon will disappear from the radiodisplay.

Parental Control can also be turned off by insertingor ejecting any disc, an ignition cycle, or pressingthe “play” icon on the radio DVD display menu.

HeadphonesThe RSE includes two sets of wirelessheadphones that are only dedicated to thissystem. These headphones are used to listen tothe DVD radio or an auxiliary device connected tothe RCA jacks. The wireless headphones havean ON/OFF switch and a volume control.

To use the headphones, turn the switch to ON.An indicator light located on the headphoneswill illuminate. If the light does not illuminate, thebatteries may need to be replaced. See “BatteryReplacement” later in this section for moreinformation. Switch the headphones to OFF whennot in use.

The infrared transmitters are located in the displaybelow the video screen. The headphones willshut off automatically to save the battery power ifthe RSE system and RSA are shut off or if theheadphones are out of range of the transmitters formore than three minutes. If you move too farforward or step out of the vehicle, the headphoneswill lose the audio signal.

To adjust the volume on the headphones, use thevolume control located on the right side.

275

If the remote control becomes lost or damaged, anew universal remote control can be purchased.If this happens, make sure the universalremote control uses a code set of Toshiba®.

Notice: Do not store the headphones in heator direct sunlight. This could damage theheadphones and repairs will not be covered byyour warranty. Keep the headphones storedin a cool, dry place.

The foam ear pads attached to the headphonesmay become worn or damaged if they arenot handled or stored properly. If the foam earpads do become damaged or worn out, the padscan be replaced separately from the headphoneset. It is not necessary to replace the completeheadphone set. The headphone replacement foamear pads can be ordered in pairs. See yourdealer for more information.

Battery ReplacementTo change the batteries, do the following:

1. Turn the screw with a coin or screw driver toloosen, then slide open the battery doorlocated on the left side of the headphones.

2. Replace the two AAA batteries in thecompartment. Make sure that they areinstalled correctly, using the diagram on theinside of the battery compartment.

3. Replace the battery door and tighten thedoor screw.

If the headphones are to be stored for a longperiod of time, remove the batteries and keep themin a cool, dry place.

276

Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks

The A/V jacks are located on the rear of the floorconsole. The A/V jacks allow audio or videosignals to be connected from an auxiliary devicesuch as a camcorder or a video game unit tothe RSE system. Adapter connectors or cablesmay be required to connect the auxiliary device tothe A/V jacks. Refer to the manufacturer’sinstructions for proper usage.

The A/V jacks are color coded to match typicalhome entertainment system equipment. The yellowjack (A) is for the video input. The white jack (B)is for the left audio input. The red jack is (C) for theright audio input.

Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by theradio system.

To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system,connect an external auxiliary device to thecolor-coded A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliarydevice and the video screen power on. If thevideo screen is in the DVD player mode, pressingthe AUX button on the remote control willswitch the video screen from the DVD playermode to the auxiliary device. The radio can listento the audio of the connected auxiliary deviceby sourcing to auxiliary. See Radio with CD andDVD on page 239 for more information.

277

How to Change the RSE VideoScreen SettingsThe screen display mode (normal, full, and zoom),screen brightness, and setup menu languagecan be changed from the on screen setup menu.To change any feature, perform the following:

1. Press the display menu button on the remotecontrol.

2. Use the remote control menu navigationarrows and the enter button to use thesetup menu.

3. Press the display menu button again toremove the setup menu from the screen.

Audio OutputAudio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs maybe heard through the following possible sources:

• Wireless Headphones

• Vehicle Speakers

• Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the rearseat audio system, if your vehicle has thisfeature.

The RSE system will always transmit the audiosignal to the wireless headphones, if there is audioavailable. See “Headphones” earlier in thissection for more information.

When a device is connected to the radio’s auxiliaryinput jack, if your vehicle has this feature, or A/Vjacks, the rear seat passengers will be able to hearaudio from the auxiliary device through the wirelessor wired headphones. The front seat passengerswill be able to listen to playback from this devicethrough the vehicle speakers by selecting AUX asthe source on the radio.

278

Video ScreenThe video screen is located in the RSE overheadconsole.

To use the video screen, do the following:

1. Push the release button located on the RSEoverhead console.

2. Turn the screen to the desired position.

When the video screen is not in use, push it upinto its locked position.

If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to itslocked position, the screen will remain on, thisis normal, and the DVD will continue to playthrough the previous audio source. Use the remotecontrol power button or eject the disc to turn offthe screen.

The RSE overhead console contains the IRtransmitters for the wireless headphones and theIR receivers for the remote control. They arelocated at the rear of the console.

Notice: Avoid directly touching the videoscreen, as damage may occur. See “Cleaningthe Video Screen” later in this section formore information.

Remote ControlTo use the remote control, aim it at the transmitterwindow at the rear of the RSE overhead consoleand press the desired button. Direct sunlightor very bright light may affect the ability of the RSEtransmitter to receive signals from the remotecontrol. If the remote control does not seem to beworking, the batteries may need to be replaced.See “Battery Replacement” later in this section.Objects blocking the line of sight may also affectthe function of the remote control.

If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD slot, theremote control power button can be used to turnon the video screen display and start the disc. Theradio can also turn on the video screen display.See Radio with CD and DVD on page 239for more information.

Notice: Storing the remote control in a hotarea or in direct sunlight may damage it,and the repairs will not be covered by yourwarranty. Keep the remote control stored in acool, dry place.

279

Remote Control Buttons

O (Power): Press this button to turn the videoscreen on and off.

P (Illumination): Press this button to turn theremote control backlight on. The backlight willautomatically time out after 7 to 10 seconds if noother button is pressed while the backlight is on.

v (Title): Press this button to return the DVD tothe main menu of the DVD. This function mayvary for each disc.

y (Main Menu): Press this button to access theDVD menu. The DVD menu is different on everyDVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrowbuttons to move the cursor around the DVD menu.After making a selection press the enter button.This button only operates when using a DVD.

n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Usethe arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.

r (Enter): Press this button to select the choicethat is highlighted in any menu.

z (Display Menu): Press this button to adjustthe brightness, screen display mode (normal,full, or zoom), and display the language menu.

q (Return): Press this button to exit the currentactive menu and return to the previous menu.This button will operate only when the displaymenu or a DVD menu is active.

c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD. Press thisbutton twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.

280

s (Play/Pause): Press this button to startplaying a DVD. Press this button while a DVD isplaying to pause it. Press it again to continueplaying the DVD.

When the DVD is playing, depending on the radio,you may be able to do slow play by pressingthe pause button then pressing the fast forwardbutton. The DVD will continue playing in aslow play mode. You may also, depending on theradio, perform reverse slow play by pressingthe pause button and then pressing the fastreverse button. To cancel slow play mode, pressthe play/pause button.

t (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this buttonto return to the start of the current track orchapter. Press this button again to go to theprevious track or chapter. This button maynot work when the DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

u (Next Track/Chapter): Press this button to goto the beginning of the next chapter or track.This button may not work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or the previews.

r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fastreverse the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing aDVD video, press the play button. To stopfast reversing a DVD audio or CD, release the fastreverse button. This button may not work whenthe DVD is playing the copyright information or thepreviews.

[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fastforward the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding aDVD video, press the play button. To stop fastforwarding a DVD audio or CD, release thefast forward button. This button may not workwhen the DVD is playing the copyright informationor the previews.

e (Audio): Press this button to change audiotracks on DVDs that have this feature whenthe DVD is playing. The format and content of thisfunction will vary for each disc.

{ (Subtitles): Press this button to turn ON/OFFsubtitles and to move through subtitle optionswhen a DVD is playing. The format and content ofthis function will vary for each disc.

281

AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch thesystem between the DVD player and an auxiliarysource.

d (Camera): Press this button to change cameraangles on DVDs that have this feature when aDVD is playing. The format and content ofthis function will vary for each disc.

1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numerickeypad provides the capability of direct chapter ortrack number selection.

\ (Clear): Press this button within three secondsafter inputting a numeric selection, to clear allnumeric inputs.

} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press this button toselect chapter or track numbers greater than 9.Press this button before inputting the number.

Battery ReplacementTo change the remote control batteries, do thefollowing:

1. Remove the battery compartment doorlocated on the bottom of the remote control.

2. Replace the two AA batteries in thecompartment. Make sure that they areinstalled correctly, using the diagram on theinside of the battery compartment.

3. Close the battery door securely.

If the remote control is to be stored for a longperiod of time, remove the batteries and keep themin a cool, dry place.

282

Problem Recommended ActionNo power. The ignition might not be

turned on or in accessory.The picture does not fill thescreen. There are blackborders on the top andbottom or on both sides orit looks stretched out.

Check the display modesettings in the setup menuby pressing the displaymenu button on the remotecontrol.

In auxiliary mode, thepicture moves or scrolls.

Check the auxiliary inputconnections at bothdevices.

The remote control doesnot work.

Check to make sure thereis no obstruction betweenthe remote control and thetransmitter window.Check the batteries tomake sure they are notdead or installedincorrectly.

After stopping the player, Ipush Play but sometimesthe DVD starts where I leftoff and sometimes at thebeginning.

If the stop button waspressed one time, the DVDplayer will resume playingwhere the DVD wasstopped. If the stop buttonwas pressed two times theDVD player will begin toplay from the beginning ofthe DVD.

Problem Recommended ActionThe auxiliary source isrunning but there is nopicture or sound.

Check that the RSE videoscreen is in the auxiliarysource mode.Check the auxiliary inputconnections at bothdevices.

Sometimes the wirelessheadphone audio cuts outor buzzes.

Check for obstructions,low batteries, receptionrange, and interferencefrom cellular telephonetowers or by using yourcellular telephone in thevehicle.Check that theheadphones are oncorrectly using the L (left)and R (right) on theheadphones.

I lost the remote and/orthe headphones.

See your dealer forassistance.

The DVD is playing, butthere is no picture orsound.

Check that the RSE videoscreen is sourced to theDVD player.

283

DVD Display Error MessagesThe DVD display error message depends onwhich radio you have. The video screen maydisplay one of the following:

Disc Load/Eject Error: This message isdisplayed when there are disc load or ejectproblems.

Disc Format Error: This message will bedisplayed, if the disc is inserted with the disc labelwrong side up, or if the disc is damaged.

Disc Region Error: This message will bedisplayed, if the disc is not from a correct region.

No Disc Inserted: This message will bedisplayed, if no disc is present when the EJECTbutton is pressed on the radio.

DVD DistortionVideo distortion may occur when operating cellularphones, scanners, CB radios, Global PositionSystems (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, orwalkie talkies.

It may be necessary to turn off the DVD playerwhen operating one of these devices in or near thevehicle.

*Excludes the OnStar® System.

Cleaning the RSE Overhead ConsoleWhen cleaning the RSE overhead console surface,use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water.

Cleaning the Video ScreenWhen cleaning the video screen, use only a cleancloth dampened with clean water. Use carewhen directly touching or cleaning the screen, asdamage may result.

284

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft ofyour vehicle’s radio. It works by using a secretcode to disable all radio functions wheneverbattery power is removed and the radio is placedin a different vehicle. This feature requires nouser input to be activated. The radio isautomatically armed when it is put into the vehiclefor the first time.

If THEFTLOCK® is activated, the radio will notoperate if stolen. The radio will display LOCKED.If this occurs, the radio will need to be returnedto your GM dealer.

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

The audio steeringwheel controls may bedifferent dependingon your vehiclesoptions. Some audiocontrols can be adjustedat the steering wheel.They include thefollowing:

xw (Next/Previous): Press the up or the downarrow to go to the next or to the previous radiostation stored as a favorite.

When a CD is playing, press the up or the downarrow to go to the next or previous track.

If your vehicle has OnStar®, press the down arrowbutton to end an OnStar® Hands-Free Call orthe Advisor Playback. It will also cancel or hang-upan incoming Hands-Free Call.

285

g (Mute/Voice Recognition): Press and releasethis button to silence the system. Press andrelease this button again, to turn the sound on.

If your vehicle has the navigation system,press and hold this button for longer thanone second to initiate voice recognition. See“Voice Recognition” in the Navigation Systemmanual for more information.

If your vehicle has OnStar®, press and hold thisbutton for longer than one second to interactwith the OnStar® system. If your vehicle also hasthe Navigation System, press this button toinitiate voice recognition and say “OnStar” to enterOnStar® mode. See the OnStar® System onpage 133 in this manual for more information.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switchbetween AM, FM, XM (if equipped), CD, andAUX jack.

+ e − e (Volume): Press the plus or minusbutton to increase or to decrease the radio volume.

¨ (Seek): Press the seek arrow to go to thenext radio station and stay there.

If you have the navigation system, some of theaudio steering wheel controls work when a DVD isplaying in the navigation radio. See the NavigationSystem manual for more information.

286

Radio Reception

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada.

You may experience interference with satelliteradio signals, while driving near tall buildings orthrough hilly areas, causing the sound to fadein and out. In addition, driving or standing underheavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnelsmay cause loss of the XM™ signal for a period oftime. The radio screen may display NO XMSIGNAL to indicate interference.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than forFM, especially at night. The longer range cancause station frequencies to interfere with eachother. For better radio reception, most AMradio stations will boost the power levels duringthe day, and then reduce these levels duringthe night. Static can also occur when things likestorms and power lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, try reducing thetreble on your radio.

FMFM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signalswill reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,causing the sound to fade in and out.

287

Care of Your CDs and DVDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the surface of aCD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD does not play properly or notat all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take asoft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth ina mild, neutral detergent solution mixed withwater, and clean it. Make sure the wiping processstarts from the center to the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface. Pick upCDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge ofthe hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD and DVD PlayerThe use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is notadvised, due to the risk of contaminating the lensof the CD optics with lubricants internal to theCD mechanism.

Multi-Band AntennaThe multi-band antenna is located on the roof ofyour vehicle. This type of antenna is used withan AM/FM radio, and if your vehicle has theOnStar® and/or the XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceSystem. Keep this antenna clear of snow andice build up for clear radio reception. If your vehiclehas a sunroof, the performance of the radiosystem may be affected if the sunroof is open.Loading items onto the roof of your vehiclecan interfere with the performance of the radiosystem and, if your vehicle has this feature,OnStar®. Make sure the multi-band antenna is notobstructed.

288

Your Driving, the Road, and YourVehicle ..................................................... 290Defensive Driving ...................................... 290Drunken Driving ........................................ 291Control of a Vehicle .................................. 294Braking ...................................................... 294Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 295Braking in Emergencies ............................. 297Traction Control System (TCS) .................. 297StabiliTrak® System ................................... 298All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System .................. 299Steering .................................................... 300Off-Road Recovery .................................... 303Passing ..................................................... 303Loss of Control .......................................... 305Driving at Night ......................................... 306

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 308City Driving ............................................... 311Freeway Driving ........................................ 312Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 313Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 314Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 314Winter Driving ........................................... 316If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,

Ice, or Snow .......................................... 320Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 321Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 321

Towing ........................................................ 326Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 326Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 326Towing a Trailer ........................................ 328

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

289

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 19.

{CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. Rear-end collisionsare about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common. Allowenough following distance. Defensivedriving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything that distractsfrom the driving task makes properdefensive driving more difficult and caneven cause a collision, with resultinginjury. Ask a passenger to help do thesethings, or pull off the road in a safe place todo them. These simple defensive drivingtechniques could save your life.

290

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the numberone contributor to the highway death toll,claiming thousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, morethan 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deathshave been associated with the use of alcohol, withmore than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly halfthe adult population — choose never to drinkalcohol, so they never drive after drinking.For persons under 21, it is against the law inevery U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are goodmedical, psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) ofsomeone who is drinking depends uponfour things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

291

According to the American Medical Association, a180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up witha BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person wouldreach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce(120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks ifeach had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors likewhiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,if the same person drank three double martinis(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.A person who consumes food just before or duringdrinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Womengenerally have a lower relative percentage of bodywater than men. Since alcohol is carried in bodywater, this means that a woman generally willreach a higher BAC level than a man of her samebody weight will when each has the samenumber of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. Insome other countries, the limit is even lower.For example, it is 0.05 percent in both Franceand Germany. The BAC limit for all commercialdrivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we haveseen, it depends on how much alcohol is in thedrinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

292

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BACof 0.10 percent. Research shows that the drivingskills of many people are impaired at a BACapproaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects areworse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAClevels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that thechance of being in a collision increases sharply fordrivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent hasdoubled his or her chance of having a collision. At aBAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driverhaving a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee ornumber of cold showers will speed that up.“I will be careful” is not the right answer. What ifthere is an emergency, a need to take suddenaction, as when a child darts into the street?A person with even a moderate BAC might notbe able to react quickly enough to avoid thecollision.

There is something else about drinking and drivingthat many people do not know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especially injuries to thebrain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that whenanyone who has been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, that person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled ishigher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Please do not drink and driveor ride with a driver who has beendrinking. Ride home in a cab; or if youare with a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

293

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make your vehicle gowhere you want it to go. They are the brakes, thesteering, and the accelerator. All three systemshave to do their work at the places where the tiresmeet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow orice, it is easy to ask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide. That meansyou can lose control of your vehicle. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 297.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 339.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 180.

Braking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long as two or three secondsor more with another. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination, and eyesight all play a part.So do alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But even inthree-fourths of a second, a vehicle moving at60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). Thatcould be a lot of distance in an emergency, sokeeping enough space between your vehicle andothers is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; thecondition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake force applied.

294

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed byheavy braking — rather than keeping pace withtraffic. This is a mistake. The brakes may not havetime to cool between hard stops. The brakeswill wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavybraking. If you keep pace with the traffic andallow realistic following distances, you willeliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you aredriving, brake normally but do not pump thebrakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder topush down. If the engine stops, you will still havesome power brake assist. But you will use itwhen you brake. Once the power assist is usedup, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedalwill be harder to push.


Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle has the Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS), an advanced electronic braking systemthat will help prevent a braking skid.

When you start your engine and begin to driveaway, ABS will check itself. You may hear amomentary motor or clicking noise while this testis going on, and you may even notice thatyour brake pedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problemwith ABS, this warninglight will stay on.See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem WarningLight on page 181.

295

Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work the brakes at eachwheel.

ABS can change the brake pressure faster thanany driver could. The computer is programmedto make the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around theobstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

296

Remember: ABS does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedalor always decrease stopping distance. If you gettoo close to the vehicle in front of you, you will nothave time to apply your brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Always leave enoughroom up ahead to stop, even though youhave ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedaldown firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You mayhear the anti-lock pump or motor operate, and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesWith ABS, you can steer and brake at the sametime. In many emergencies, steering can help youmore than even the very best braking.

Traction Control System (TCS)Your vehicle has a traction control system thatlimits wheel spin. This is especially useful inslippery road conditions. The system operates onlyif it senses that one or more of the wheels arespinning or beginning to lose traction. When thishappens, the system works the brakes andreduces engine power to limit wheel spin.

This light will come onwhen your tractioncontrol system is limitingwheel spin.

You may feel or hear the system working, but thisis normal.

297

The traction control system automatically comeson whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheelspin, especially in slippery road conditions, youshould always leave the system on. But youcan turn the traction control system off if you everneed to. You should turn the system off if yourvehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice or snowand rocking the vehicle is required. See RockingYour Vehicle to Get It Out on page 321.

The traction controlsystem can be turnedoff by pressing thetraction control button,located next to thegear shift lever.

The traction control system can be activated againby pressing the traction control button.

If the system is limiting wheel spin when youpress the button, the traction control off light willappear on the instrument panel cluster. Thesystem will not turn off until there is no longer acurrent need to limit wheel spin. You can turn thesystem back on at any time by pressing the

button again. If the light does not come on, youmay not have traction control and your vehicleshould be serviced by a dealer.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 339 for more information.

StabiliTrak® SystemYour vehicle has this feature. The StabiliTrak®

system is an advanced computer controlled systemthat helps the driver maintain directional controlof the vehicle in difficult driving conditions. This isaccomplished by selectively applying any oneof the vehicle’s brakes and reducing engine power.The StabiliTrak® system comes on automaticallywhenever you start your vehicle.

The STABILITRAK NOT READY message may bedisplayed in the DIC and the traction controlsystem and StabiliTrak® warning light on theinstrument panel cluster will be on after first drivingthe vehicle and exceeding 30 mph 48 (km/h) for30 seconds. The StabiliTrak® system is off until thelight has turned off. This could take up to15 minutes. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 200 for more information.

298

The traction control system and StabiliTrak®

warning light on the instrument panel cluster willflash when the system is operating. You may alsofeel or hear the system working. This is normal.

StabiliTrak® can be turned off using the tractioncontrol button. To disable StabiliTrak®, press andhold the traction control button for five seconds.StabiliTrak® can be activated again by pressing thetraction control button.

The SERVICE STABILITRAK message will bedisplayed and the traction control systemand StabiliTrak® warning light on the instrumentpanel cluster will come on if there is a problem withthe system. When this light and the SERVICESTABILITRAK message are on, the system is notoperational. Adjust your driving accordingly.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) SystemIf your vehicle has all-wheel drive (AWD), the AWDsystem operates automatically without any actionrequired by the driver. If the front drive wheelsbegin to slip, the rear wheels will automaticallybegin to drive the vehicle as required. Torque isalso applied to the rear wheels during launches.There may be a slight engagement noise duringhard use but this is normal.

This light is located onthe instrument panelcluster.

This light and the SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVEmessage in the DIC will come on and stay onto indicate there may be a problem with the drivesystem and service is required.

See Service All-Wheel Drive Light on page 191and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 200 formore information.

299

This light will come onalong with the ALLWHEEL DRIVE OFFmessage when the reardrive system isoverheating.

This light will turn off when the rear drive systemcools down. If this light stays on, it must bereset. To reset the light, turn the ignition off andthen back again. If the light stays on, seeyour dealer for service.

See “All Wheel Drive Off” under DIC Warningsand Messages on page 200 for more information.

Steering

Electric Power SteeringIf the engine stalls while you are driving, thepower steering assist system will continueto operate until you are able to stop your vehicle.If you lose power steering assist because theelectric power steering system is not functioning,you can steer, but it will take more effort.

If you turn the steering wheel in either directionseveral times until it stops, or hold the steeringwheel in the stopped position for an extendedamount of time, you may notice a reduced amountof power steering assist. The normal amount ofpower steering assist should return shortly after afew normal steering movements.

The electric power steering system does notrequire regular maintenance. If you suspectsteering system problems, such as abnormallyhigh steering effort for a prolonged period of time,contact your dealer for service repairs.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidentsmentioned on the news happen on curves.Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics when driving oncurves. The traction of the tires against the roadsurface makes it possible for the vehicle to changeits path when you turn the front wheels. If there isno traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in thesame direction. If you have ever tried to steer avehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.

300

The traction you can get in a curve depends onthe condition of your tires and the road surface,the angle at which the curve is banked, and yourspeed. While you are in a curve, speed is theone factor you can control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly accelerate. Both controlsystems — steering and acceleration — have todo their work where the tires meet the road.Adding the sudden acceleration can demand toomuch of those places. You can lose control.See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 297Traction Control System (TCS) and StabiliTrak®

System on page 298.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease upon the brake or accelerator pedal, steer thevehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that youshould adjust your speed. Of course, the postedspeeds are based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less favorable conditions you willwant to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, whileyour front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steadyspeed. Wait to accelerate until you are out ofthe curve, and then accelerate gently intothe straightaway.


301

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you come overa hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a carsuddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child dartsout from between parked cars and stops right infront of you. You can avoid these problems bybraking — if you can stop in time. But sometimesyou cannot; there is not room. That is the time forevasive action — steering around the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First apply your brakes.

See Braking on page 294. It is better to remove asmuch speed as you can from a possible collision.Then steer around the problem, to the left orright depending on the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attentionand a quick decision. If you are holding thesteering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clockpositions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees veryquickly without removing either hand. But youhave to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quicklystraighten the wheel once you have avoidedthe object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

302

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have droppedoff the edge of a road onto the shoulder whileyou are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease offthe accelerator and then, if there is nothing in theway, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edgeof the pavement. You can turn the steering wheelup to one-quarter turn until the right front tirecontacts the pavement edge. Then turn yoursteering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,since the passing vehicle occupies the samelane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a briefsurrender to frustration or anger can suddenlyput the passing driver face to face with the worstof all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to thesides, and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect your passing patterns. If youhave any doubt whatsoever about makinga successful pass, wait for a better time.

303

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings,and lines. If you can see a sign up aheadthat might indicate a turn or an intersection,delay your pass. A broken center lineusually indicates it is all right to pass, providingthe road ahead is clear. Never cross a solidline on your side of the lane or a double solidline, even if the road seems empty ofapproaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you wantto pass while you are awaiting an opportunity.For one thing, following too closely reducesyour area of vision, especially if you arefollowing a larger vehicle. Also, you will nothave adequate space if the vehicle aheadsuddenly slows or stops. Keep back areasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is comingup, start to accelerate but stay in the rightlane and do not get too close. Time your moveso you will be increasing speed as the timecomes to move into the other lane. If the wayis clear to pass, you will have a runningstart that more than makes up for the distanceyou would lose by dropping back. And if

something happens to cause you to cancelyour pass, you need only slow down and dropback again and wait for another opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slowvehicle, wait your turn. But take care thatsomeone is not trying to pass you as you pullout to pass the slow vehicle. Remember toglance over your shoulder and check theblind spot.

• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and start your left lane changesignal before moving out of the right lane topass. When you are far enough ahead ofthe passed vehicle to see its front inyour vehicle’s inside mirror, activate the rightlane change signal and move back intothe right lane. Remember that your vehicle’spassenger side outside mirror is convex.The vehicle you just passed may seem to befarther away from you than it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at atime on two-lane roads. Reconsider beforepassing the next vehicle.

304

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle toorapidly. Even though the brake lamps arenot flashing, it may be slowing down or startingto turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enoughfriction where the tires meet the road to do what thedriver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route orarea of less danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions, andby not overdriving those conditions. But skidsare always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,your wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid is best handled by easing yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.

Remember: Any traction control system helpsavoid only the acceleration skid. If your tractionsystem is off, then an acceleration skid is also besthandled by easing your foot off the acceleratorpedal. See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 297 and StabiliTrak® System onpage 298.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot offthe accelerator pedal and quickly steer theway you want the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, your vehicle maystraighten out. Always be ready for a second skidif it occurs.

305

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.For safety, you will want to slow down and adjustyour driving to these conditions. It is importantto slow down on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance will be longer and vehicle controlmore limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, orbraking, including reducing vehicle speed byshifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You may not realize thesurface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.Learn to recognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snow on the road tomake a mirrored surface — and slow down whenyou have any doubt.

Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)helps avoid only the braking skid.

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, you may needto slow down and keep more space betweenyou and other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only somuch road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.

306

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They may cut down onglare from headlamps, but they also make alot of things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjustto the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,as from a driver who does not lower the highbeams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,slow down a little. Avoid staring directly intothe approaching headlamps.

Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night ismade much worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle andflash more than clean glass would, making thepupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep youreyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as the headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should youreyes be examined regularly. Some drivers sufferfrom night blindness — the inability to see in dimlight — and are not even aware of it.

307

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On awet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn aswell because your tire-to-road traction is not asgood as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not havemuch tread left, you will get even less traction. It isalways wise to go slower and be cautious if rainstarts to fall while you are driving. The surface mayget wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned fordriving on dry pavement.

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see.Even if your windshield wiper blades are in goodshape, a heavy rain can make it harder to seeroad signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,the edge of the road, and even people walking.

It is wise to keep your windshield wiper andwasher system in good shape and keep yourwindshield washer fluid reservoir filled with washerfluid. Replace your windshield wiper insertswhen they show signs of streaking or missingareas on the windshield, or when strips of rubberstart to separate from the inserts.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. Theymay not work as well in a quick stop andmay cause pulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a car wash, apply your brake pedallightly until your brakes work normally.

308

Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven going through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect your brakes.Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try to slowdown before you hit them.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under your tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road is wetenough and you are going fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contactwith the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can ifyour tires do not have much tread or if thepressure in one or more is low. It can happen if alot of water is standing on the road. If you cansee reflections from trees, telephone poles,or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’ssurface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly throughdeep puddles or standing water, water cancome in through your engine’s air intake andbadly damage your engine. Never drive throughwater that is slightly lower than the underbodyof your vehicle. If you cannot avoid deeppuddles or standing water, drive through themvery slowly.

309

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carried away.As little as six inches of flowing water cancarry away a smaller vehicle. If thishappens, you and other vehicle occupantscould drown. Do not ignore police warningsigns, and otherwise be very cautiousabout trying to drive through flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Turn on your low-beam headlamps — not just

your parking lamps — to help make you morevisible to others.

• Besides slowing down, allow some extrafollowing distance. And be especially carefulwhen you pass another vehicle. Allow yourselfmore clear room ahead, and be prepared tohave your view restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth.See Tires on page 386.

310

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets isthe amount of traffic on them. You will wantto watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 312.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal. Atraffic light is there because the corner isbusy enough to need it. When a light turnsgreen, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be running thered light.

311

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads.But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway drivingis: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Driveat the same speed most of the other drivers aredriving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks asmooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on a freewayas a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, youshould begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try tomerge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, andglance over your shoulder as often as necessary.Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speedto the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if itis slower. Stay in the right lane unless youwant to pass.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Thenuse your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make sure there is notanother vehicle in your blind spot.

312

Once you are moving on the freeway, makecertain you allow a reasonable following distance.Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not, under any circumstances, stop andback up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed is usually posted.

Reduce your speed according to yourspeedometer, not to your sense of motion.After driving for any distance at higher speeds,you may tend to think you are going slower thanyou actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.If you must start when you are not fresh — such asafter a day’s work — do not plan to make toomany miles that first part of the journey. Wearcomfortable clothing and shoes you can easilydrive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needsservice, have it done before starting out. Of course,you will find experienced and able service expertsin GM dealerships all across North America. Theywill be ready and willing to help if you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have youchecked all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lensesclean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor long-distance driving? Are the tiresall inflated to the recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weatheroutlook along your route? Should youdelay your trip a short time to avoid a majorstorm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

313

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at thewheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack ofawareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of roadwith the same scenery, along with the hum of thetires on the road, the drone of the engine, and therush of the wind against the vehicle that can makeyou sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,your vehicle can leave the road in less than asecond, and you could crash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis?First, be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, witha comfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road aheadand to the sides. Check your mirrors and yourinstruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, getsome exercise, or both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.

314

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Checkall fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,cooling system, and transaxle. These partscan work hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, your brakescould get so hot that they would not workwell. You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let your engine assistyour brakes on a steep downhill slope.

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. Your brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would then havepoor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Always have yourengine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear whenyou go down a steep or long hill.

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shiftdown to a lower gear. The lower gears helpcool your engine and transaxle, and you canclimb the hill better.

315

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalledcar or an accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a fallingrocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to theseand take appropriate action.

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergencysupplies in your vehicle.

Also see Tires on page 386.

316

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, asupply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, somewinter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, ared cloth, and a couple of reflective warningtriangles. And, if you will be driving under severeconditions, include a small bag of sand, apiece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags tohelp provide traction. Be sure you properlysecure these items in your vehicle.

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tiresmeet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between the tiresand the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,and will need to be very careful. What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold

snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.But wet ice can be even more trouble because itmay offer the least traction of all. You can getwet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), andfreezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.

317

Traction control improves your ability to acceleratewhen driving on a slippery road. But you can turnthe traction system off if you ever need to. Youshould turn the traction system off if your vehicleever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See IfYour Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snowon page 320. Even though your vehicle has atraction system, you will want to slow down andadjust your driving to the road conditions. Undercertain conditions, you may want to turn the tractionsystem off, such as when driving through deepsnow and loose gravel, to help maintain vehiclemotion at lower speeds. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 297 and StabiliTrak®

System on page 298.

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves yourvehicle’s stability when you make a hard stopon a slippery road. Even though you have ABS,you will want to begin stopping sooner thanyou would on dry pavement. See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS) on page 295.

• Allow greater following distance on anyslippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might befine until you hit a spot that is covered withice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches

may appear in shaded areas where the suncannot reach, such as around clumps of trees,behind buildings, or under bridges. Sometimesthe surface of a curve or an overpass mayremain icy when the surrounding roadsare clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead ofyou, brake before you are on it. Try notto brake while you are actually on the ice, andavoid sudden steering maneuvers.

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in aserious situation. You should probably stay withyour vehicle unless you know for sure that you arenear help and you can hike through the snow. Hereare some things to do to summon help and keepyourself and your passengers safe:• Turn on your hazard flashers.• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that

you have been stopped by the snow.• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around

you. If you do not have blankets or extraclothing, make body insulators fromnewspapers, burlap bags, rags, floormats — anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing tokeep warm.

318

You can run the engine to keep warm, but becareful.

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside.CO could overcome you and kill you. Youcannot see it or smell it, so you might notknow it is in your vehicle. Clear awaysnow from around the base of yourvehicle, especially any that is blockingyour exhaust pipe. And check aroundagain from time to time to be sure snowdoes not collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side ofthe vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. Thissaves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go alittle faster than just idle. That is, push theaccelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for theheat that you get and it keeps the battery charged.

319

You will need a well-charged battery to restart thevehicle, and possibly for signaling later on withyour headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeat this only when youfeel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it aslittle as possible. Preserve the fuel as long asyou can. To help keep warm, you can get out ofthe vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercisesevery half hour or so until help comes.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, youwill need to spin the wheels, but you do notwant to spin your wheels too fast. The methodknown as rocking can help you get out when youare stuck, but you must use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you orothers could be injured. And, thetransaxle or other parts of the vehicle canoverheat. That could cause an enginecompartment fire or other damage. Whenyou are stuck, spin the wheels as little aspossible. Do not spin the wheels above35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on thespeedometer.

Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy partsof your vehicle as well as the tires. If youspin the wheels too fast while shiftingthe transaxle back and forth, you can destroythe transaxle. See Rocking Your Vehicle toGet It Out on page 321.

For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 406.

320

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right.That will clear the area around the front wheels. Ifyour vehicle has traction control, you shouldturn the traction control system off. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 297. Thenshift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and aforward gear, spinning the wheels as little aspossible. Release the accelerator pedal while youshift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinningthe wheels in the forward and reverse directions,you will cause a rocking motion that may free yourvehicle. If that does not get your vehicle outafter a few tries, it may need to be towed out. Ifyour vehicle does need to be towed out, seeTowing Your Vehicle on page 326.

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weight yourvehicle can carry. Two labels on your vehicleshow how much weight it may properly carry, theTire and Loading Information label and theVehicle Certification label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

321

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will findthe label attached below the door lock post (striker).The tire and loading information label lists thenumber of occupant seating positions (A), and themaximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilogramsand pounds. The vehicle capacity weight includesthe weight of all occupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.

The Tire and Loading Information label also lists thetire size of the original equipment tires (C) and therecommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). Formore information on tires and inflation, see Tires onpage 386 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 393.

There is also important loading information on theCertification/Tire label. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rearaxles. See “Certification/Tire Label” later in thissection.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on yourvehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

Label Example

322

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculated inStep 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity for your vehicle.

If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing aTrailer on page 328 for important informationon towing a trailer, towing safety rules, andtrailering tips.

Item Description Total

AMaximum VehicleCapacity Weight forExample 1 =

1,000 lbs (453 kg)

BSubtractOccupant Weight150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupantand Cargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)

Example 1

323



1,000 lbs (453 kg)


750 lbs (340 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg)



1,000 lbs (453 kg)


1,000 lbs (453 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading informationlabel for specific information about your vehicle’smaximum vehicle capacity weight and seatingpositions. The combined weight of the driver,passengers, and cargo should never exceed yourvehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity weight.

Example 2 Example 3

324

Certification Label

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is foundon the rear edge of the driver’s door.

The label shows the size of your original tires andthe inflation pressures needed to obtain the grossweight capacity of your vehicle. This is called theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWRincludes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants,fuel, and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label also tells you themaximum weights for the front and rear axles,called the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

To find out the actual loads on your front and rearaxles, you need to go to a weigh station and weighyour vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. Besure to spread out your load equally on both sidesof the centerline.

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or theGAWR for either the front or rear axle.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

325

If you put things inside your vehicle — likesuitcases, tools, packages, or anything else — theywill go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have tostop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they willkeep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the cargo area of yourvehicle. Try to spread the weightevenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded downunless you need to.

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towingservice if you need to have your disabled vehicletowed. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 462.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes (such as behinda motorhome), see “Recreational VehicleTowing” following.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing yourvehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind amotorhome. The two most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghytowing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground) and “dolly towing” (towingyour vehicle with two wheels on the ground andtwo wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).

With the proper preparation and equipment, manyvehicles can be towed in these ways. See“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.

326

Here are some important things to considerbefore you do recreational vehicle towing:

• What’s the towing capacity of the towingvehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long theycan tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice and equipmentrecommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just asyou would prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, you’ll want to make sure your vehicle isprepared to be towed. See Before Leaving ona Long Trip on page 313.

Dinghy Towing

Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle withall four wheels on the ground, or even withonly two of its wheels on the ground, willdamage drivetrain components. Do not tow anall-wheel-drive vehicle if any of its wheelswill be on the ground.

Your vehicle was not designed to be towed withall of its wheels on the ground. If you have atwo-wheel-drive vehicle, it can be towed withtwo of its wheels on the ground. See “DollyTowing” following. If you have an all-wheel-drivevehicle, it cannot be towed with any of itswheels on the ground. It can be towed with thecar carrier equipment.

Dolly TowingIf you have a two-wheel-drive vehicle, it can betowed with two of its wheels on the ground.To dolly tow your vehicle, do the following:1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead

position with a clamping device designed fortowing.

5. Release the parking brake.

Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle withall four wheels on the ground, or even with onlytwo of its wheels on the ground, will damagedrivetrain components. Do not tow anall-wheel-drive vehicle if any of its wheels willbe on the ground.

327

If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, it cannot betowed with any of its wheels on the ground. It canbe towed with car carrier equipment.

Towing a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipmentand drive properly, you can lose controlwhen you pull a trailer. For example, if thetrailer is too heavy, the brakes may notwork well — or even at all. You and yourpassengers could be seriously injured.Pull a trailer only if you have followed allthe steps in this section. Ask your dealerfor advice and information about towing atrailer with your vehicle.

Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly candamage your vehicle and result in costly repairsthat would not be covered by your warranty.Always follow the instructions in this sectionand check with your dealer for more informationabout towing a trailer with your vehicle.

To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle,you should read the information in “Weight ofthe Trailer” that appears later in this section.Trailering is different than just driving your vehicleby itself. Trailering means changes in handling,acceleration, braking, durability, and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment,and it has to be used properly.

That is the reason for this section. In it are manytime-tested, important trailering tips and safetyrules. Many of these are important for your safetyand that of your passengers. So please readthis section carefully before you pull a trailer.

328

If You Do Decide To Pull A TrailerIf you do, here are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speedlimit restrictions, having to do with trailering.Make sure your rig will be legal, not only whereyou live but also where you will be driving.A good source for this information can be stateor provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches”later in this section.

• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first500 miles (800 km) your new vehicle is driven.Your engine, axle or other parts could bedamaged.

• During the first 500 miles (800 km) that youtow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and do not make starts at fullthrottle. This helps your engine and other partsof your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

Three important considerations have to do withweight:

• Weight of the trailer

• Weight of the trailer tongue

• Weight on your vehicle’s tires

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

Your vehicle can tow up to 3,500 lbs (1 575 kg).But even that can be too heavy.

It depends on how you plan to use your rig. Forexample, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and how much your vehicle is used topull a trailer are all important. It can also dependon any special equipment that you have onyour vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight thevehicle can carry. See “Weight of the TrailerTongue” later in this section for more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assumingonly the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has allthe required trailering equipment. The weightof additional optional equipment, passengers andcargo in the tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.

You can ask your dealer for our traileringinformation or advice, or you can write us at ourCustomer Assistance Offices. See CustomerAssistance Offices on page 460 for moreinformation.

329

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an importantweight to measure because it affects the totalor gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross VehicleWeight (GVW) includes the curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, andthe people who will be riding in the vehicle. If youhave a lot of options, passengers, or cargo inthe vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight yourvehicle can carry, which will also reduce the trailerweight your vehicle can tow. And if you will towa trailer, you must add the tongue load to the GVWbecause your vehicle will be carrying that weight,too. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 321for more information about your vehicle’s maximumload capacity.

If you are using a weight-carrying or aweight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongueweight (A) should be 10 percent to 15 percent ofthe total loaded trailer weight (B). Do not exceedthe maximum allowable tongue weight for yourvehicle.

After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailerand then the tongue, separately, to see if theweights are proper. If they are not, you may beable to get them right simply by moving someitems around in the trailer.

330

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to theupper limit for cold tires. You will find thesenumbers on the Certification/Tire Label at the rearedge of the driver’s door, or see Loading YourVehicle on page 321. Then be sure you do not goover the GVW limit for your vehicle, includingthe weight of the trailer tongue.

HitchesIt is important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and roughroads are a few reasons why you will need theright hitch. Here are some rules to follow:

• If you will be pulling a trailer that, whenloaded, will weigh more than 2,000 lbs(900 kg), be sure to use a properly mounted,weight-carrying hitch and sway control ofthe proper size. This equipment is veryimportant for proper vehicle loading and goodhandling when you’re driving.

• Will you have to make any holes in the body ofyour vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?

If you do, remember to seal the holes when youremove the hitch. If you do not seal them,deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from yourexhaust can get into your vehicle. See EngineExhaust on page 127. Dirt and water can, too.

Safety ChainsYou should always attach chains between yourvehicle and your trailer. Cross the safetychains under the tongue of the trailer to helpprevent the tongue from contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch. Instructionsabout safety chains may be provided by the hitchmanufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation forattaching safety chains and do not attach them tothe bumper. Always leave just enough slack soyou can turn with your rig. Never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.

Trailer BrakesIf your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg)loaded, then it needs its own brakes – and theymust be adequate. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for the trailer brakes so you will beable to install, adjust and maintain them properly.

331

Because your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes,do not try to tap into your vehicle’s brake system.If you do, both brake systems will not work well,or at all.

Driving with a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you have the liftgate open and you pulla trailer with your vehicle, carbonmonoxide (CO) could come into yourvehicle. You cannot see or smell CO. Itcan cause unconsciousness or death. SeeEngine Exhaust on page 127. To maximizeyour safety when towing a trailer:

• Have your exhaust system inspectedfor leaks, and make necessary repairsbefore starting on your trip.

• Keep the liftgate closed.



• If exhaust does come into your vehiclethrough a window in the rear oranother opening, drive with your front,main heating or cooling system onand with the fan on any speed. Thiswill bring fresh, outside air into yourvehicle. Do not use the climate controlsetting for maximum air because itonly recirculates the air inside yourvehicle. See Climate Control Systemon page 166.

Towing a trailer requires a certain amount ofexperience. Before setting out for the open road,you will want to get to know your rig. Acquaintyourself with the feel of handling and braking withthe added weight of the trailer. And alwayskeep in mind that the vehicle you are driving isnow a good deal longer and not nearly asresponsive as your vehicle is by itself.

332

Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains, electrical connector,lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer haselectric brakes, start your vehicle and trailermoving and then apply the trailer brake controllerby hand to be sure the brakes are working.This lets you check your electrical connection atthe same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be surethat the load is secure, and that the lamps and anytrailer brakes are still working.

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle aheadas you would when driving your vehicle withouta trailer. This can help you avoid situationsthat require heavy braking and sudden turns.

PassingYou will need more passing distance up aheadwhen you are towing a trailer. And, becauseyou are a good deal longer, you will need to gomuch farther beyond the passed vehiclebefore you can return to your lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel with onehand. Then, to move the trailer to the left,just move that hand to the left. To move the trailerto the right, move your hand to the right. Alwaysback up slowly and, if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer to come incontact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making very sharp turnswhile trailering.

When you are turning with a trailer, make widerturns than normal. Do this so your trailer willnot strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, treesor other objects. Avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers. Signal well in advance.

333

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerWhen you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to haveextra wiring.

The arrows on your instrument panel will flashwhenever you signal a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will alsoflash, telling other drivers you are about to turn,change lanes or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbson the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may thinkdrivers behind you are seeing your signal whenthey are not. It’s important to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are still working.

Driving On GradesReduce speed and shift to a lower gear beforeyou start down a long or steep downgrade. If youdo not shift down, you might have to use yourbrakes so much that they would get hot andno longer work well.

If you are towing a trailer that weighs more than1,000 lbs (450 kg), drive in INTERMEDIATE (I)instead of DRIVE (D) or, as you need to, a lowergear. This will minimize heat build-up andextend the life of your transaxle.

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park your vehicle,with a trailer attached, on a hill. Ifsomething goes wrong, your rig couldstart to move. People can be injured, andboth your vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, dothe following:

1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift intoPARK (P) yet.

2. Have someone place chocks under the trailerwheels.

334

3. When the wheel chocks are in place,release the regular brakes until the chocksabsorb the load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply yourparking brake, and then shift to PARK (P).

5. Release the regular brakes.

When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal

down while you do the following:

• Start your engine.

• Shift into a gear.

• Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear ofthe chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up andstore the chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer TowingYour vehicle will need service more often whenyou are pulling a trailer. See the MaintenanceSchedule for more on this. Things that areespecially important in trailer operation areautomatic transaxle fluid, engine oil, belts, coolingsystem and brake system. Each of these iscovered in this manual, and the Index will helpyou find them quickly. If you are trailering, it is agood idea to review these sections before youstart your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts andbolts are tight.

335

✍ NOTES

336

Service ........................................................ 339Accessories and Modifications ................... 339California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 340Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 340Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your

Vehicle ................................................... 341Fuel ............................................................. 341

Gasoline Octane ........................................ 341Gasoline Specifications .............................. 341California Fuel ........................................... 342Additives ................................................... 342Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 343Filling the Tank ......................................... 343Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 345

Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 346Hood Release ........................................... 347Engine Compartment Overview .................. 348Engine Oil ................................................. 349Engine Oil Life System .............................. 352Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 354Automatic Transaxle Fluid ......................... 357Engine Coolant .......................................... 357Engine Overheating ................................... 360

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode ..................................... 362

Cooling System ......................................... 362Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 368Brakes ...................................................... 369Battery ...................................................... 372Jump Starting ............................................ 373

All-Wheel Drive ........................................... 378Bulb Replacement ....................................... 380

Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 380Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,

Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps ............. 381Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and

Back-up Lamps ...................................... 382License Plate Lamp ................................... 383Replacement Bulbs ................................... 384

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 384Tires ............................................................ 386

Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 387Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 390Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 393Tire Pressure Monitor System ................... 395Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 399

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

337

When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 401Buying New Tires ...................................... 401Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 403Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 403Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 405Wheel Replacement .................................. 405Tire Chains ............................................... 406If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 407Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 408Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 409Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire ............................................. 411Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 418Compact Spare Tire .................................. 420

Appearance Care ........................................ 420Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 420Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 422Leather ...................................................... 423Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic

Surfaces ................................................ 424Care of Safety Belts .................................. 424Weatherstrips ............................................ 425

Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 425Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 425Finish Care ............................................... 425Windshield and Wiper Blades .................... 426Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ......... 426Tires ......................................................... 427Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 427Finish Damage .......................................... 428Underbody Maintenance ............................ 428Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 428Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 429

Vehicle Identification .................................. 430Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 430Service Parts Identification Label ............... 430

Electrical System ........................................ 431Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 431Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 431Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 431Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..................... 432Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............... 434

Capacities and Specifications .................... 436

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

338

ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wantsyou to be happy with it. We hope you will goto your dealer for all your service needs. You willget genuine GM parts and GM-trained andsupported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle allGM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

Accessories and ModificationsWhen you add non-GM accessories to your vehiclethey can affect your vehicle’s performance andsafety, including such things as, airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systemslike anti-lock brakes, traction control andstability control. Some of these accessories mayeven cause malfunction or damage not covered bywarranty.

GM Accessories are designed to complement andfunction with other systems on your vehicle.Your GM dealer can accessorize your vehicleusing genuine GM Accessories. When you go toyour GM dealer and ask for GM Accessories,you will know that GM-trained and supportedservice technicians will perform the work usinggenuine GM Accessories.

339

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, containand/or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts andsystems (including some inside the vehicle), manyfluids, and some component wear by-productscontain and/or emit these chemicals.

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacementparts, and tools before you attempt anyvehicle maintenance task.



• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English andmetric fasteners can be easilyconfused. If you use the wrongfasteners, parts can later break or falloff. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work,you will want to use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how to service yourvehicle than this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 474.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work, seeServicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 88.

You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Maintenance Recordon page 452.

340

Adding Equipment to the Outsideof Your VehicleThings you might add to the outside of yourvehicle can affect the airflow around it. This maycause wind noise and affect windshield washerperformance. Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an importantpart of the proper maintenance of your vehicle.To help keep your engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, GM recommendsthe use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline.

Gasoline OctaneUse regular unleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane ratingis less than 87, you may notice an audibleknocking noise when you drive, commonly referredto as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. Ifyou are using gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher and you hear heavy knocking, your engineneeds service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines maycontain an octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT). General Motors recommends against theuse of gasolines containing MMT. See Additiveson page 342 for additional information.

341

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet CaliforniaEmissions Standards, it is designed to operate onfuels that meet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission control label. If this fuel isnot available in states adopting Californiaemissions standards, your vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control systemperformance may be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle mayfail a smog-check test. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 184. If this occurs, return toyour authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it isdetermined that the condition is caused by the typeof fuel used, repairs may not be covered byyour warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the UnitedStates are now required to contain additivesthat will help prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing your emissioncontrol system to work properly.

In most cases, you should not have to addanything to your fuel. However, some gasolinescontain only the minimum amount of additiverequired to meet U.S. Environmental ProtectionAgency regulations. To help keep fuel injectorsand intake valves clean, or if your vehicleexperiences problems due to dirty injectors orvalves, look for gasoline that is advertised as TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline. Also, your dealer hasadditives that will help correct and preventmost deposit-related problems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethersand ethanol, and reformulated gasolines maybe available in your area. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines if theycomply with the specifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuelscontaining more than 10% ethanol must not beused in vehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in your fuel system and also damagethe plastic and rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under your warranty.

342

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.General Motors recommends against the use ofsuch gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and the performance ofthe emission control system may be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If thisoccurs, return to your dealer for service.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outsidethe United States or Canada, the proper fuel maybe hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline orany other fuel not recommended in the previoustext on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use ofimproper fuel would not be covered by yourwarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoidinjuries to you and others, read and followall the instructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are nearfuel or refueling your vehicle. Keepsparks, flames, and smoking materialsaway from fuel. Do not leave the fuelpump unattended when refueling yourvehicle. This is against the law in someplaces. Keep children away from the fuelpump; never let children pump fuel.

343

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hingedfuel door on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowlycounterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it; ifthe cap is released too soon, it will spring backto the right.

{CAUTION:

If you spill fuel and then somethingignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuelcan spray out on you if you open the fuelcap too quickly. This spray can happen ifyour tank is nearly full, and is more likelyin hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowlyand wait for any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfillthe tank and wait a few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon aspossible. See Washing Your Vehicle on page 425.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until itclicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap hasbeen left off or improperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 184.

344

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, donot remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow offuel by shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant. Leave thearea immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure toget the right type. Your dealer can get onefor you. If you get the wrong type, it may notfit properly. This may cause your malfunctionindicator lamp to light and may damageyour fuel tank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 184.

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while itis in your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the container can ignite thegasoline vapor. You can be badly burnedand your vehicle damaged if this occurs.To help avoid injury to you and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is inside avehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed, or on any surface other than theground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with theinside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.

345

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start upand injure you even when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.

346

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the handle withthis symbol on it. Itis located insidethe vehicle, tothe left of the brakepedal.

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and movethe secondary hood release lever to the right.

3. Lift the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler capsare on properly. Then pull the hood down andclose it firmly.

347

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood you will see the following:

348

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 354.

B. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 349.

C. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 349.

D. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See Brakes onpage 369.

E. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Fusesand Circuit Breakers on page 431.

F. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See JumpStarting on page 373.

G. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See EngineCoolant on page 357.

H. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. SeeWindshield Washer Fluid on page 368.

Engine Oil

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beon level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 348for the location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oilseveral minutes to drain back into the oil pan.If you do not do this, the oil dipstick mightnot show the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a papertowel or cloth, then push it back in all theway. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,and check the level.

349

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tipof the dipstick, you will need to add at leastone quart/liter of oil. But you must use the rightkind. This section explains what kind of oil to use.For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacitiesand Specifications on page 436.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets abovethe cross-hatched area that shows theproper operating range, the engine could bedamaged.

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 348 for thelocation of the engine oilfill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range in thecross-hatched area. Push the dipstick all theway back in when you are through.

SAE 5W-30 may notappear on all caps.

350

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for two things:

• GM6094M

Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GMStandard GM6094M. You should look forand use only an oil that meets GM StandardGM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 isbest for your vehicle. If you are in an areaof extreme cold, where the temperature fallsbelow −20°F (−29°C), it is recommendedthat you use either an SAE 5W-30 synthetic oilor an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provideeasier cold starting and better protection forthe engine at extremely low temperatures.These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting theserequirements shouldalso have the starburstsymbol on thecontainer. This symbolindicates that the oilhas been certified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

You should look for this information on the oilcontainer, and use only those oils that are identifiedas meeting GM Standard GM6094M and have thestarburst symbol on the front of the oil container.

351

Notice: Use only engine oil identified asmeeting GM Standard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum Institute CertifiedFor Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failureto use the recommended oil can result inengine damage not covered by your warranty.

GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirementsfor your vehicle.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol that meet GMStandard GM6094M are all you will need for goodperformance and engine protection.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer system that lets youknow when to change the engine oil and filter.This is based on engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage. Based on drivingconditions, the mileage at which an oil changewill be indicated can vary considerably. For the oillife system to work properly, you must reset thesystem every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life hasbeen diminished, it will indicate that an oil changeis necessary. A change engine oil light and aCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will comeon. Change your oil as soon as possible withinthe next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, ifyou are driving under the best conditions, the oillife system may not indicate that an oil changeis necessary for over a year. However, your engineoil and filter must be changed at least once ayear and at this time the system must be reset.Your dealer has GM-trained service peoplewho will perform this work using genuine GM partsand reset the system. It is also important tocheck your oil regularly and keep it at theproper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)since your last oil change. Remember to reset theoil life system whenever the oil is changed.

352

How to Reset the Engine OilLife SystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when tochange your engine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Anytime your oil is changed, reset thesystem so it can calculate when the next oilchange is required. If a situation occurs where youchange your oil prior to a change engine oil lightor CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messagebeing turned on, reset the system.

1. Turn the ignition key to RUN with theengine off.

2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedalthree times within five seconds.The change engine oil light will flash while thesystem is resetting.

3. When the light stops flashing, turn the keyto LOCK.

If the light or message comes back on and stayson when you start your vehicle, the engine oillife system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements thatmay be unhealthy for your skin and couldeven cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean your skin and nailswith soap and water, or a good hand cleaner.Wash or properly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oilproducts.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Never dispose ofoil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on theground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies ofwater. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a placethat collects used oil. If you have a problemproperly disposing of your used oil, ask yourdealer, a service station, or a local recyclingcenter for help.

353

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterThe engine air cleaner/filter is located in theengine compartment on the passenger’s side ofthe vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 348 for more information on location.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace it at the first oil changeafter each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. SeeScheduled Maintenance on page 440 for moreinformation. If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at each engine oilchange.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filterfrom the vehicle and lightly shake the filter torelease loose dust and dirt. If the filter remainscaked with dirt, a new filter is required.

To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter,do the following:

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Disconnect the air flow sensor electricalconnector.

354

3. Disconnect the crank case ventilation tube.

4. Loosen the screws on the clamps holdingthe air outlet duct in place. Do not pry theclamps off.

5. Remove the air outlet duct.

355

6. Undo the clamps on the filter cover. Toremove the cover, pull up on the frontand then pull the cover out.

7. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.Wipe all dust from inside of the housing andinspect the air cleaner and air outlet ductfor cracks, cuts, and deterioration. Theair outlet duct must be replaced if damaged.

8. Reinstall the filter cover and latch the clamps.

9. Reattach the air outlet duct and tighten thescrews on the clamps that hold the duct inplace.

10. Reconnect the crank case ventilation tube.

11. Reconnect the air flow sensor electricalconnector.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you or othersto be burned. The air cleaner not onlycleans the air; it helps to stop flames ifthe engine backfires. If it is not there andthe engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with the aircleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfirecan cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into your engine, which willdamage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter inplace when you are driving.

356

Automatic Transaxle FluidIt is not necessary to check the transaxle fluidlevel. A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason forfluid loss. If a leak occurs, take your vehicle tothe dealership service department and haveit repaired as soon as possible.

Change the fluid at the intervals listed in AdditionalRequired Services on page 443, and be sure touse the transaxle fluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 449.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransaxle fluid may damage your vehicle, andthe damages may not be covered by yourwarranty. Always use the automatic transaxlefluid listed in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 449.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant isdesigned to remain in your vehicle for five years or150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occursfirst, if you add only DEX-COOL® extendedlife coolant.

The following explains your cooling system andhow to add coolant when it is low. If you havea problem with engine overheating, see EngineOverheating on page 360.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to −34°F(−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work as theyshould.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, atthe first maintenance service after each30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

357

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which willnot damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolantmixture, you do not need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolantmixture, your engine could overheat and bebadly damaged. The repair cost would not becovered by your warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four timesa year, have your dealer check your coolingsystem.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system, youcould damage your vehicle. Use only theproper mixture of the engine coolant listed inthis manual for the cooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 449 for more information.

358

Checking Coolant

The surge tank is located on the driver’s side ofthe engine compartment. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 348 for moreinformation on location.

{CAUTION:

Turning the surge tank pressure cap whenthe engine and radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids to blow outand burn you badly. Never turn the surgetank pressure cap — even a little — whenthe engine and radiator are hot.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. Whenyour engine is cold, the coolant level should be atthe COLD FILL line. When your engine iswarm, the level should be at the COLD FILL lineor a little higher.

359

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the surge tank,but only when the engine is cool.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it ishand-tight and fully seated.

Engine OverheatingYou will find a coolant temperature gage on yourvehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gage on page 183. There are severaldifferent types of engine overheating messages thatmay be displayed in the Driver Information Center(DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 200.

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine canburn you badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away from the engine if yousee or hear steam coming from it. Turn itoff and get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Wait untilthere is no sign of steam or coolantbefore you open the hood.

If you keep driving when the vehiclesengine is overheated, the liquids in it cancatch fire. You or others could be badlyburned. Stop your engine if it overheats,and get out of the vehicle until the engineis cool.

See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 362 forinformation on driving to a safe place inan emergency.

360

Notice: If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty. SeeOverheated Engine Protection Operating Modeon page 362 for information on driving to asafe place in an emergency.

If No Steam Is Coming FromYour EngineAn overheat warning can indicate a seriousproblem.

If you get an engine overheat warning, but see orhear no steam, the problem may not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine can get a little toohot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer.

If you get the overheat warning with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. If the air conditioner is on, turn it off.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fanspeed and open the windows as necessary.

3. Try to minimize engine load. If you are in atraffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N); otherwise,shift to the highest gear while driving.

If you no longer have the overheat warning, youcan drive. Just to be safe, drive slower forabout ten minutes. If the warning does not comeback on, you can drive normally.

If the warning continues and you have notstopped, pull over, stop, and park your vehicleright away.

If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle theengine for three minutes while you are parked.If you still have the warning, turn off the engineand get everyone out of the vehicle until itcools down. Also, see “Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode” later in this section.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to getservice help right away.

361

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating ModeThis emergency operating mode lets your vehiclebe driven to a safe place in an emergency situation.If an overheated engine condition exists, anoverheat protection mode which alternates firinggroups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage.In this mode, there is a significant loss in power andengine performance. The temperature gageindicates an overheat condition exists. Drivingextended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in theoverheat protection mode should be avoided.

Notice: After driving in the overheated engineprotection operating mode, to avoid enginedamage, allow the engine to cool beforeattempting any repair. The engine oil will beseverely degraded. Repair the cause of coolantloss, change the oil and reset the oil life system.See Engine Oil on page 349.

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here iswhat you will see:

A. Electric Engine Cooling FansB. Coolant Surge Tank

362

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under thehood can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.

The coolant level should be at the COLD FILL line.If it is not, you may have a leak at the radiatorhoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump,or somewhere else in the cooling system.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do nottouch them. If you do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak. Ifyou run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,check to see if the electric engine cooling fansare running. If the engine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they are not, your vehicleneeds service. Turn off the engine.

363

Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered by yourwarranty. See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 362 for information ondriving to a safe place in an emergency.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changing sooner, at30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantSurge Tank

Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fillprocedure. Failure to follow this procedurecould cause your engine to overheat andbe severely damaged.

If you have not found a problem yet, check to seeif coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolantis visible but the coolant level is not at the COLDFILL line, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolantsurge tank, but be sure the cooling system,including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, iscool before you do it.

364

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and ifyou turn the coolant surge tank pressurecap — even a little — they can come out athigh speed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait forthe cooling system and coolant surgetank pressure cap to cool if you ever haveto turn the pressure cap.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

365

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolant andthe proper coolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

1. You can remove thecoolant surge tankpressure capwhen the coolingsystem, includingthe coolantsurge tank pressurecap and upperradiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwiseabout one-quarter of a turn. If you hear ahiss, wait for that to stop. This will allow anypressure still left to be vented out thedischarge hose.

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly,and remove it.

366

3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture, to the COLDFILL line.

4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,start the engine and let it run until you canfeel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watchout for the engine cooling fans.By this time, the coolant level inside thecoolant surge tank may be lower. If the level islower, add more of the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture to the coolant surge tank untilthe level reaches the COLD FILL line.

5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure thepressure cap is hand-tight.

367

6. After driving the vehicle, check the level in thesurge tank again when the cooling systemhas cooled down.

If the coolant is not at the proper level, repeatSteps 1 through 3 and reinstall the pressure cap.If the coolant is not at the proper level whenthe system cools down again, see your dealer.

Windshield Washer FluidWhat to UseWhen you need windshield or rear window washerfluid be sure to read the instructions before use. Ifyou will be operating your vehicle in an area wherethe temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluidthat has sufficient protection against freezing.

Adding Windshield Washer Fluid

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 348for reservoir location.

Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution tofreeze and damage your washer fluid tankand other parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean as wellas washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold.This allows for expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damage the tank if itis completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damageyour washer system and paint.

368

Brakes

Brake Fluid

Your brake mastercylinder reservoir isfilled with DOT-3 brakefluid. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 348 for thelocation of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir might go down. The firstis that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptablelevel during normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are put in, the fluid level goes backup. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out ofthe brake system. If it is, you should have yourbrake system fixed, since a leak means thatsooner or later your brakes will not work well, orwill not work at all.

So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If youadd fluid when your linings are worn, then you willhave too much fluid when you get new brakelinings. You should add or remove brake fluid, asnecessary, only when work is done on thebrake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, itcan spill on the engine. The fluid will burnif the engine is hot enough. You or otherscould be burned, and your vehicle couldbe damaged. Add brake fluid only whenwork is done on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When your brake fluid falls to a low level, yourbrake warning light will come on. See BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 180.

369

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealedcontainer only. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 449.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and thearea around the cap before removing it. Thiswill help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in the brakesystem, the brakes may not work well, orthey may not even work at all. This couldcause a crash. Always use the properbrake fluid.

Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just afew drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in the brake system candamage brake system parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced. Do notlet someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful not to spill brakefluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 425.

Brake WearYour vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are worn and new pads are needed.The sound may come and go or be heard allthe time your vehicle is moving, except when youare pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

370

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon the brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates may causea brake squeal when the brakes are first applied orlightly applied. This does not mean something iswrong with your brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tightenwheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torquespecifications.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does not returnto normal height, or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you apply the brakes, with or withoutthe vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Itsmany parts have to be of top quality and work welltogether if the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. Your vehicle was designed and tested withtop-quality GM brake parts. When you replace partsof your braking system — for example, when yourbrake linings wear down and you need new onesput in — be sure you get new approved GMreplacement parts. If you do not, your brakes mayno longer work properly. For example, if someoneputs in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle,the balance between your front and rear brakes canchange — for the worse. The braking performanceyou have come to expect can change in many otherways if someone puts in the wrong replacementbrake parts.

371

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery.When it is time for a new battery, get one that hasthe replacement number shown on the originalbattery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®

replacement battery.

For battery replacement, see your dealer or theservice manual. To purchase a service manual,see Service and Owner Publications in ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 474.Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm. Washhands after handling.

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for25 days or more, remove the black, negative (-)cable from the battery. This will help keepyour battery from running down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 373 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.

You must close all doors and the liftgate beforereconnecting the battery. After reconnectingthe battery, you must press the unlock button onthe remote keyless entry transmitter. Failureto follow this procedure may result in a soundingalarm. Pressing unlock on the remote keylessentry transmitter would stop the sounding alarm.

372

Jump StartingIf your battery has run down, you may want to useanother vehicle and some jumper cables to startyour vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps todo it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or

ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to your vehicle that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.Trying to start your vehicle by pushing orpulling it will not work, and it could damageyour vehicle.1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a

12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a12-volt system with a negative ground,both vehicles can be damaged. Only usevehicles with 12-volt systems with negativegrounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If they are, it couldcause a ground connection you do notwant. You would not be able to start yourvehicle, and the bad grounding could damagethe electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,set the parking brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump start procedure. Putan automatic transaxle in PARK (P) ora manual transaxle in NEUTRAL before settingthe parking brake.

373

Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Always turn off your radio and otheraccessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplugunnecessary accessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or the accessory power outlet.Turn off the radio and all lamps that are notneeded. This will avoid sparks and help saveboth batteries. And it could save your radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+)and negative (−) terminal locations on eachvehicle.You will not need to access your battery forjump starting. Your vehicle has a remotepositive (+) and a remote negative (−) jumpstarting terminal for that purpose.

The remote positive (+)terminal is locatedunder the enginecompartment fuse blockcover, and is markedwith a plus (+) symbolon the cover. To accessthe terminal, removethe fuse block cover.

The remote negative (−)terminal is located in thefront of the enginecompartment, near theengine oil dipstick.

See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 348 for more information on the locationof the remote positive (+) terminal and theengine oil dipstick.

374

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you.Keep hands, clothing and tools away fromany underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if you needmore light.

Be sure the battery has enough water.You do not need to add water to thebattery installed in your new vehicle.



But if a battery has filler caps, be sure theright amount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of that first. If youdo not, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burnyou. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or on yourskin, flush the place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts caninjure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine isrunning.

375

5. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged, too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+)will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−)will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine partor to a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) oryou will get a short that would damagethe battery and maybe other parts, too. Anddo not connect the negative (−) cable tothe negative (−) terminal on the dead batterybecause this can cause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal of the dead battery.Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connectit to the positive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable tothe negative (−) terminal of the good battery.Use a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anything untilthe next step. The other end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the dead battery. Itgoes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine partor to a remote negative (−) terminal on thevehicle with the dead battery.

376

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cableat least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the deadbattery, but not near engine parts that move.The electrical connection is just as good there,and the chance of sparks getting back to thebattery is much less.Your vehicle has a remote negative (−)terminal for this purpose.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good batteryand run the engine for a while.

11. Press the unlock button on the remotekeyless entry transmitter to disarm yourcontent theft-deterrent system.

12. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected orremoved in the wrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage the vehicle. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Alwaysconnect and remove the jumper cables in thecorrect order, making sure that the cables donot touch each other or other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part orRemote Negative (−) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) andRemote Negative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

Jumper Cable Removal

377

To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from theother vehicle.

5. Return the fuse block cover to its originalposition.

All-Wheel DriveIf you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure toperform the lubricant checks described in thissection. However, there are two additional systemsthat need lubrication.

Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit)When to Check LubricantRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinehow often to check the lubricant. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 440.

378

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should beon a level surface.

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plughole, you’ll need to add some lubricant. Addenough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom ofthe filler plug hole, located on the transfer case.

What to UseRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of lubricant to use. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 449.

Carrier Assembly-Differential(Rear Drive Module)When to Check and Change LubricantRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinehow often to check the lubricant and when tochange it. See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 440.

How to Check Lubricant

A. Fill PlugB. Drain Plug

AWD Differential Case

379

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should beon a level surface.

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plughole, you’ll need to add some lubricant. Addenough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom ofthe filler plug hole. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem; check and have it repaired, if needed.

What to UseRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of lubricant to use. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 449.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 384.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and can burst if you drop orscratch the bulb. You or others could beinjured. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions on the bulb package.

380

Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,Sidemarker, and Parking LampsTo replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release onpage 347 for more information.

2. Remove the three headlamp assemblyattachment screws.

3. Pull the headlamp assembly toward you torelease it from the hidden, lower headlampmount. The headlamp assembly will need tobe carefully disengaged from the vehicle.

A. Sidemarker LampB. Parking/Turn Signal LampC. Low/High-Beam/DRL Headlamp

4. Pull the locking tab back on the bulb socketand push the release tab in to release thewiring harness. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove it from theheadlamp assembly.

5. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket.

6. Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstallthe socket into the headlamp assembly byturning it clockwise.

381

7. Connect the electrical connector.

8. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to reinstall theheadlamp assembly. When reinstalling thethree headlamp screws, do not overtighten.

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplampsand Back-up Lamps

A. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Sidemarker LampB. Turn Signal Lamp/TaillampC. Backup Lamp

To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on page 107 formore information.

2. Remove the taillamp screw covers.

3. Remove the taillamp screws.

4. Pull the taillamp assembly towards you.

382

5. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise todisconnect it from the taillamp assembly.

6. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket.

7. Push the new bulb into the bulb socket.

8. Insert the bulb socket into the taillampassembly and turn it clockwise to secure.

9. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall thetaillamp assembly. When reinstalling thescrews, do not overtighten.

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Remove the two screws holding each ofthe license plate lamps to the liftgatehandle.

2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp downthrough the liftgate opening.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andpull the bulb straight out of the socket.

4. Install the new bulb.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall thelicense plate lamp.

383

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp Bulb NumberBack-Up, Rear Turn Signal,Stoplamp and Taillamp 3157

Front and Rear Sidemarker Lamp 194Front Turn Signal Lamp 5702ALicense Plate Lamp 9421330Low/High-Beam Headlamp/DRL H13

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contactyour dealer.

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected forwear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 440 for more information.

Replacement blades come in different types andare removed in different ways. For proper type andlength, see Normal Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 450.

Here’s how to replace the windshield wiperblades:

1. Make sure the front wipers are turned off.

2. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from thewindshield.

384

3. Pull up the release clip, located at theconnecting point of the blade and the arm.Then, pull the blade assembly down toward theglass to remove it from the wiper arm.

4. Push the new wiper blade securely on thewiper arm until you hear the release clip“click” into place.

5. Push the release clip, from Step 3, down tosecure the wiper blade into place.

Rear Window Wiper Blade ReplacementTo replace the rear window wiper blade, do thefollowing:

1. Make sure that the rear wiper is off.

2. Pull the wiper away from the rear window.

3. Pull up the release clip, located at theconnecting point of the blade and thearm. Then, pull the blade assembly downtoward the glass to remove it from thewiper arm.

4. Push the new wiper blade securely on thewiper arm until you hear the release clip“click” into place.

5. Push the release clip, from Step 3, down tosecure the wiper blade into place.

385

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your GM Warranty bookletfor details. For additional information refer tothe tire manufacturer’s booklet included withyour vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly usedtires are dangerous.

• Overloading your vehicle’s tires cancause overheating as a result of toomuch friction. You could have anair-out and a serious accident. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 321.



• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.Tire pressure should be checked whenyour vehicle’s tires are cold. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 393.

• Overinflated tires are more likely to becut, punctured, or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when you hit apothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. Ifthe tire’s tread is badly worn, or ifyour vehicle’s tires have beendamaged, replace them.

386

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The examples below show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tiresidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): TheDepartment of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

387

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tiresbased on three performance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperature resistance. For moreinformation see Uniform Tire Quality Gradingon page 403.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation LoadLimit: Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact sparetire or temporary use tire has a tread life ofapproximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and shouldnot be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).The compact spare tire is for emergency use whena regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. Ifyour vehicle has a compact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire on page 420 and If a TireGoes Flat on page 407.

Compact Spare Tire Example

388

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following the DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation LoadLimit: Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire orcompact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressureand inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 393.

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters andnumbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and service description. Theletter T as the first character in the tire size meansthe tire is for temporary use only.

(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atypical passenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The UnitedStates version of a metric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character in the tire sizemeans a passenger vehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tire and RimAssociation.

389

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is60, as shown in item C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent ashigh as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction;the letter D means diagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter B means belted-biasply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel ininches.

(F) Service Description: These charactersrepresent the load range and speed rating of thetire. The load index represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The load indexcan range from 1 to 279. The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire is certified to carry aload. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tirepressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are, automatictransmission/transaxle, power steering, powerbrakes, power windows, power seats, andair conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

390

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built upheat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 393.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 321.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 321.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for therear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 321.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number rangingfrom 1 to 279 that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum airpressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.The maximum air pressure is molded ontothe sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

391

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 321.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 393 and LoadingYour Vehicle on page 321.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in whichthe ply cords that extend to the beads are laidat 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximum speed atwhich a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread ofa tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadremains. See When It Is Time for New Tires onpage 401.

392

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 403.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 321.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on anindividual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached toa vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weightand the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tire andLoading Information Label” under LoadingYour Vehicle on page 321.

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

393

A Tire and Loading Information label is attached tothe vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). This label showsyour vehicle’s original equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressures for your tires when theyare cold. The recommended cold tire inflationpressure, shown on the label, is the minimumamount of air pressure needed to support yourvehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an example ofthe Tire and Loading Information label, seeLoading Your Vehicle on page 321. How you loadyour vehicle affects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load your vehicle with more weightthan it was designed to carry.

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more. Do notforget to check the compact spare tire, it should beat 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional informationregarding the compact spare tire, see CompactSpare Tire on page 420.

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them. Radialtires may look properly inflated even when theyare under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflationpressure when the tires are cold. Cold means yourvehicle has been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirtand moisture.

394

Tire Pressure Monitor SystemYour vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS). This system uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressure levels. TPMSsensors are mounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, except for the spare tire. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle’stires and transmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), shouldbe checked monthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommended by the vehiclemanufacturer on the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires ofa different size than the size indicated on thevehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safetyfeature, your vehiclehas been equipped witha tire pressuremonitoring system(TPMS) that illuminatesa low tire pressuretelltale when oneor more of your tires issignificantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and check your tiresas soon as possible, and inflate them to theproper pressure. Driving on a significantlyunder-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat andcan lead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

395

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, evenif under-inflation has not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMSmalfunction indicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with the low tirepressure telltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash for approximatelyone minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long as themalfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, thesystem may not be able to detect or signal lowtire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions mayoccur for a variety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. Always check the TPMSmalfunction telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to function properly.

When a low tire pressure condition is detected,the TPMS will illuminate the low tire pressurewarning symbol on the instrument panel cluster,and at the same time a message to checkthe pressure in a specific tire will appear on theDriver Information Center (DIC) display. Thelow tire pressure warning symbol on the instrumentpanel cluster and the check tire pressuremessage will appear at each ignition cycle untilthe tires are inflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tire pressure levels canbe viewed by the driver. For additional informationand details about the DIC operation and displayssee DIC Operation and Displays on page 195and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 200.

The low tire pressure warning light may come on incool weather when the vehicle is first started,and then turn off as you start to drive. This maybe an early indicator that the air pressure inthe tire(s) are getting low and need to be inflatedto the proper pressure.

A Tire and Loading Information Label, attached toyour vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’soriginal equipment tires and the correct inflationpressure for your vehicle’s tires when they are cold.

396

See Loading Your Vehicle on page 321, for anexample of the Tire and Loading InformationLabel and its location on your vehicle. Also seeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 393.

Your vehicle’s TPMS system can warn you about alow tire pressure condition but it does not replacenormal tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 399 and Tires on page 386.

Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if your vehiclehas Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquid sealantcan damage the tire pressure monitor sensors.

The TPMS will not function properly if one or moreof the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. Ifthe system detects a missing or inoperable sensor,an error message SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM will be shown on the DIC display. If youhave replaced a tire/wheel assembly withouttransferring the TPMS sensors, the error messagewill be displayed. Once you re-install the TPMSsensors, the error message should go off. See yourdealer for service if all TPMS sensors are installedand the error message comes on and stays on.

TPMS Sensor Matching ProcessEach TPMS sensor has a unique identificationcode. Any time you replace one or more ofthe TPMS sensors or rotate the vehicle’s tires, theidentification codes will need to be matched tothe new tire/wheel position. The sensors arematched, to the tire/wheel positions, in thefollowing order: driver side front tire, passengerside front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driverside rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool.See your dealer for service.

The TPMS sensors may also be matched to eachtire/wheel position by increasing or decreasingthe tire’s air pressure. When increasing the tire’spressure, do not exceed the maximum inflationpressure indicated on the tire’s sidewall.

You will have two minutes to match each tire andwheel position. If it takes longer than twominutes to match any tire and wheel position, thematching process stops and you will need tostart over.

397

The TPMS matching process is outlined below:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition switch to RUN with theengine off.

3. Using the DIC, press the vehicle informationbutton until the TIRE LOCATIONS PRESS V

TO LEARN message displays.

4. Press the set/reset button to allow the systemto learn the tire positions. The horn will soundtwice to indicate the receiver is ready, andthe TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE messagedisplays. The TPMS system is ready for thesensor matching process to begin.

5. Start with the driver side front tire.

6. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s valvestem. Activate the TPMS sensor by increasingor decreasing the tire’s air pressure forfive seconds, or until a horn chirp sounds.

The horn chirp, which may take up to30 seconds to sound, confirms that the sensoridentification code has been matched to thetire/wheel position. To decrease the tire’sair-pressure use the pointed end of the valvecap, a pencil-style air pressure gage, or a key.

7. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, andrepeat the procedure in Step 6.

8. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, andrepeat the procedure in Step 6.

9. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, andrepeat the procedure in Step 6.

10. After hearing the confirming horn chirp for thedriver side rear tire, the tire learning processends. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.

11. Set all four tires to the recommended airpressure level as indicated on the tire andloading information label.

12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.

398

Federal Communications Commission(FCC) and Industry and Science CanadaThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)operates on a radio frequency and complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subjectto the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)operates on a radio frequency and complies withRSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.


Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate yourtires as soon as possible and check wheelalignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 401and Wheel Replacement on page 405 formore information.The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve moreuniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. Thefirst rotation is the most important. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 440 for scheduled rotationintervals.

When rotating your tires, always use the correctrotation pattern shown here.

399

Do not include the compact spare tire in your tirerotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust thefront and rear inflation pressures as shown onthe Tire and Loading Information label. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 393 and LoadingYour Vehicle on page 321.

Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See“TPMS Sensor Matching Process” underTire Pressure Monitor System on page 395.

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properlytightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications on page 436.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust ordirt from places where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency, you canuse a cloth or a paper towel to do this;but be sure to use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rust or dirtoff. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 408.

400

When It Is Time for New TiresOne way to tell when itis time for new tires isto check the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining. Somecommercial truck tiresmay not have treadwearindicators.

You need a new tire if any of the followingstatements are true:• You can see the indicators at three or more

places around the tire.• You can see cord or fabric showing through

the tire’s rubber.• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or

snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage

that cannot be repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tires foryour vehicle. The original equipment tiresinstalled on your vehicle, when it was new, weredesigned to meet General Motors TirePerformance Criteria Specification (TPC spec)system rating. If you need replacement tires, GMstrongly recommends that you get tires withthe same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehiclewill continue to have tires that are designed togive the same performance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as the original tires.

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers overa dozen critical specifications that impact theoverall performance of your vehicle, includingbrake system performance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM’s TPC Spec number is moldedonto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.If the tires have an all-season tread design,the TPC spec number will be followed by an MSfor mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labelingon page 387 for additional information.

401

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol while driving. If you mix tires ofdifferent sizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires), the vehicle may nothandle properly, and you could have acrash. Using tires of different sizes,brands, or types may also cause damageto your vehicle. Be sure to use the correctsize, brand, and type of tires on allwheels. It is all right to drive with yourcompact spare temporarily, as it wasdeveloped for use on your vehicle. SeeCompact Spare Tire on page 420.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires with thewheels on your vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with thosethat do not have a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size, load range, speedrating, and construction type (radial andbias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed onthe Tire and Loading Information label. Thislabel is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 321,for more information about the Tire and LoadingInformation label and its location on your vehicle.

402

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a different sizethan your original equipment wheels and tires,this may affect the way your vehicle performs,including its braking, ride and handlingcharacteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.Additionally, if your vehicle has electronicsystems such as, anti-lock brakes, traction control,and electronic stability control, the performanceof these systems can be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, yourvehicle may not provide an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tires notrecommended for those wheels areselected. You may increase the chancethat you will crash and suffer seriousinjury. Only use GM specific wheel andtire systems developed for your vehicle,and have them properly installed by a GMcertified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 401 andAccessories and Modifications on page 339 foradditional information.

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

403

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conformto federal safety requirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative rating basedon the wear rate of the tire when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tire graded 150 wouldwear one and a half (1.5) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded 100. Therelative performance of tires depends upon theactual conditions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the norm due to variationsin driving habits, service practices, and differencesin road characteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked Cmay have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tireis based on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest),B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,under-inflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

404

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give youthe longest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tirebalancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.However, if you notice unusual tire wear or yourvehicle pulling to one side or the other, thealignment may need to be checked. If you noticeyour vehicle vibrating when driving on a smoothroad, your tires and wheels may need to berebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air,replace it (except some aluminum wheels,which can sometimes be repaired). See yourdealer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset andbe mounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheelbolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only withnew GM original equipment parts. This way, youwill be sure to have the right wheel, wheelbolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehiclecan be dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of your vehicle,make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collision inwhich you or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for replacement.

405

Notice: The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chain clearanceto the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 408 for moreinformation.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven. Itcould fail suddenly and cause a crash. Ifyou have to replace a wheel, use a newGM original equipment wheel.

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

Do not use tire chains. There is not enoughclearance. Tire chains used on a vehiclewithout the proper amount of clearancecan cause damage to the brakes,suspension or other vehicle parts. The areadamaged by the tire chains could causeyou to lose control of your vehicle and youor others may be injured in a crash.Use another type of traction device only ifits manufacturer recommends it for use onyour vehicle and tire size combination androad conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer’s instructions. To help avoiddamage to your vehicle, drive slowly,readjust or remove the device if it iscontacting your vehicle, and do not spinyour vehicle’s wheels. If you do findtraction devices that will fit, install them onthe front tires.

406

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’stires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly. But if youshould ever have a blowout, here are a few tipsabout what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a dragthat pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take yourfoot off the accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain laneposition, and then gently brake to a stop well outof the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts muchlike a skid and may require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rear blowoutremove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Getthe vehicle under control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpyand noisy, but you can still steer. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to domaintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to usethe jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

407

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn onyour vehicle’s hazard warning flashers. SeeHazard Warning Flashers on page 150 for moreinformation.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll overor fall on you or other people. You andthey could be badly injured or even killed.Find a level place to change your tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).

3. Turn off the engine and do not restartwhile the vehicle is raised.

4. Do not allow passengers to remain inthe vehicle.

To be even more certain the vehicle willnot move, you should put blocks at thefront and rear of the tire farthest awayfrom the one being changed. That wouldbe the tire, on the other side, at theopposite end of the vehicle.

408

When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the followingexample as a guide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks.

The following information will tell you next how touse the jack and change a tire.

Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsIf your vehicle has the rear compartment storagepanel/cover, you will have to remove it to accessthe load floor. See Rear Compartment StoragePanel/Cover on page 140 for more information.

To access the spare tire and tools, do thefollowing:

1. Lift the load floor up and pull it out of thevehicle and set it aside.

409

2. Remove the nut retaining the spare tire.

3. Remove the compact spare tire. See CompactSpare Tire on page 420 for more information.

4. Locate the jack and wheel wrench, which arelocated on the driver’s side of the rear cargoarea, behind an access door. Pull out theaccess door to reach them.

5. Remove thewing-bolt holding thejack and thenremove it.

6. Remove the hook and loop fastener strapsholding the bag containing the wheel wrench.Remove the wheel wrench from the bag.

7. Extend the socket portion of the wrench fromthe handle.

410

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare TireYou must take off the wheel cover or center cap, ifthe vehicle has one, to reach the wheel bolts.

1. Loosen all fiveplastic caps byturning the wheelwrenchcounterclockwise.Do not try to removeplastic caps fromthe cover orcenter cap.

2. Pull the cover or center cap away from thewheel.

3. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheelnuts. Do not remove them yet.

4. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack bolt headand turn the wheel wrench clockwise. Thatwill raise the lift head a little.

5. Place the jack near the flat tire.

Notice: Make sure that the jack lift head is inthe correct position or you may damageyour vehicle. The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty.

411

6. Find the arrow on the plastic lower bodypanel. Position the jack head under themetal jacking flange and not the plastic lowerbody panel.

With the jack head positioned correctly on themetal jacking flange, it should look like thisfrom underneath.

412

Do not lift the vehicle using the plastic lowerbody panel.

7. Put the compact spare tire near you.

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jackedup is dangerous. If the vehicle slips offthe jack you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make the vehicle fall. Tohelp avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lift headinto the proper location before raising thevehicle.

413

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to domaintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire. 8. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle

clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground so there is enough room forthe road tire to clear the ground.

414

9. Remove all of thewheel nuts.

10. Remove the flat tire.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the partsto which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts become loose after time. Thewheel could come off and cause anaccident. When you change a wheel,



remove any rust or dirt from the placeswhere the wheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, you can use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sure to usea scraper or wire brush later, if needed, toget all the rust or dirt off.

11. Remove any rust ordirt from the wheelbolts, mountingsurfaces, and sparewheel.

415

12. Place the compact spare tire on thewheel-mounting surface.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.If you do, the nuts might come loose.Your wheel could fall off, causing aserious accident.

13. Reinstall the wheel nuts. Tighten each nut byhand until the wheel is held against the hub.

14. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handlecounterclockwise.

416

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause the wheelto come loose and even come off. Thiscould lead to an accident. Be sure to usethe correct wheel nuts. If you have toreplace them, be sure to get new GMoriginal equipment wheel nuts. Stopsomewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrench tothe proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 436for wheel nut torque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenlytighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 436 forthe wheel nut torque specification.

15. Tighten the wheelnuts firmly in acrisscross sequence,as shown.

16. Lower the jack all the way and remove thejack from under the vehicle.

17. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly with the wheelwrench.

When reinstalling the wheel cover or center capon the full-size tire, tighten all five plastic capshand snug with the aid of the wheel wrench andtighten them with the wheel wrench an additionalone-quarter of a turn.

417

Notice: Wheelcovers will not fit on yourcompact spare. If you try to put a wheel coveron the compact spare, you could damagethe cover or the spare.Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compactspare tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover in thecargo area until you have the flat tire repaired orreplaced.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipmentin the passenger compartment of thevehicle could cause injury. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these in theproper place.

To store the flat tire or the spare tire and tools, dothe following:

1. Place the wheel wrench into the bag.

2. Use the hook and loop fastener straps tosecure the bag to the jack.

3. Install the jack in theleft side panel ofcargo area andsecure it with thewing bolt.

4. Remove the wheel stow rod from the left sideof the floor compartment.

418

5. Screw the threaded wheel stow rod onto thespare tire bracket. The final position of thewheel stow rod must be turned to the farthestforward position.

6. If your vehicle has a cap, remove the capfrom the center of the load floor. Positionthe rod through the hole.

7. Place the flat, or damaged tire, face down,on the load floor with the threaded wheelstow rod sticking up through the center holeof the wheel.

8. Install the nut onto the wheel stow rod andtighten.

9. If your vehicle has a rear compartmentstorage panel/cover, reinstall the panel/coverin either the center or upper position. SeeRear Compartment Storage Panel/Cover onpage 140 for more information.

The compact spare is for temporary use only.Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tireas soon as possible.

419

Compact Spare TireAlthough the compact spare tire was fully inflatedwhen the vehicle was new, it can lose air aftera time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. Itshould be 60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on the vehicle,stop as soon as possible and make sure thespare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spareis made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles(5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and havethe full-size tire repaired or replaced at yourconvenience. Of course, it is best to replace thespare with a full-size tire as soon as possible. Thespare tire will last longer and be in good shapein case it is needed again.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed,do not take your vehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the rails. That candamage the tire and wheel, and maybeother parts of your vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.

And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheelwith other wheels or tires. They will not fit.Keep the spare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compactspare. Using them can damage your vehicleand can damage the chains too. Do not use tirechains on your compact spare.

Appearance Care

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look itsbest if it is cleaned often. Although not alwaysvisible, dust and dirt can accumulate on yourupholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming isrecommended to remove particles from yourupholstery. It is important to keep your upholsteryfrom becoming and remaining heavily soiled.Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes ofheat that could cause stains to set rapidly.

420

Lighter colored interiors may require morefrequent cleaning. Use care because newspapersand garments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to yourvehicle’s interior.

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only usecleaners specifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned. Permanent damage may result fromusing cleaners on surfaces for which they were notintended. Use glass cleaner only on glass. Removeany accidental over-spray from other surfacesimmediately. To prevent over-spray, apply cleanerdirectly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass and/or cause damageto the rear window defogger. When cleaningthe glass on your vehicle, use only a soft clothand glass cleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safetyinstructions on the label. While cleaning yourvehicle’s interior, maintain adequate ventilation byopening your vehicle’s doors and windows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

Your dealer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, youcan also obtain a product from your dealer toremove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object toremove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damageto your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rubaggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use ofheavy pressure can damage your interior anddoes not improve the effectiveness of soilremoval.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoidlaundry detergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leavea residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops pergallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

421

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents suchas naptha, alcohol, etc.

Fabric/CarpetCleaning Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust andloose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic, andpainted surfaces with a clean, damp cloth.

Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabricand carpet. They will clean normal spots andstains very well.

If the vehicle has the Ultra Lux® suede fabric,follow the listed procedures except do not use anysolvents or dry cleaning products.

Here are some cleaning tips:

• Always read the instructions on the cleanerlabel.

• Clean up stains as soon as you can, beforethey set.

• Carefully scrape off any excess stain.

• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to aclean area often. A soft brush may be used ifstains are stubborn.

• To avoid forming a ring on fabric after spotcleaning, clean the entire area immediatelyor it will set.

Most stains can be removed with club soda water.To clean, use the following instructions:

1. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft white cloth.For solids: remove as much as possible andthen vacuum or brush.

2. Apply club soda water to a clean, soft whitecloth. Do not over-saturate; the cloth shouldnot drip water.

3. Clean the entire area. Avoid getting the fabrictoo wet.

4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain toavoid a ring effect.

5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of thecloth each time it becomes soiled.

6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleanedarea with another dry clean, soft white cloth.

422

Using Cleaner on Fabric1. First, try the cleaner in an inconspicuous area

to make sure the cleaner does not affect thecolor of the fabric.

2. For liquids: blot the stain with a clean, softwhite cloth.For solids: remove as much as possible andthen vacuum or brush.

3. Spray a small amount of the cleaner onto aclean, soft white cloth. Do not apply spraydirectly to the fabric.

4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain toavoid a ring effect.

5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of thecloth each time it becomes soiled.

6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleanedarea with another dry clean, soft white cloth.

7. If the cleaner leaves a ring effect, follow upwith the club soda water instructions givenearlier in this section.

Special Fabric Cleaning ProblemsStains caused by such things as catsup, coffee,tea, milk, fruit, fruit juice, jelly, cheese, chocolate,vomit, urine, and blood can be removed usingthe club soda water instructions given earlier in thissection. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit orurine, treat the area with a water and baking sodasolution: 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water. Let dry.

Stains caused by oil and grease can be cleanedwith an approved GM cleaner and a clean,white cloth.

1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.

2. Clean with cool water and allow to drycompletely.

3. If a stain remains, follow the cleanerinstructions described earlier.

LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water may beused to remove dust. If a more thorough cleaningis necessary, a soft cloth dampened with amild soap solution can be used. Allow the leatherto dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.

423

Never use steam to clean leather. Never use spotlifters or spot removers on leather. Manycommercial leather cleaners and coatings that aresold to preserve and protect leather maypermanently change the appearance and feel ofyour leather and are not recommended. Donot use silicone or wax-based products, or thosecontaining organic solvents to clean yourvehicle’s interior because they can alter theappearance by increasing the gloss in anon-uniform manner. Never use shoe polish onyour leather.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with amild soap solution can be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removerson plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserve and protectsoft plastic surfaces may permanently change theappearance and feel of your interior and are

not recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss onyour instrument panel. The increase in glossmay cause annoying reflections in the windshieldand even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

424

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather frequent application maybe required. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 449.

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.

Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of thesun. Use a car washing soap. Do not usestrong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure torinse the vehicle well, removing all soapresidue completely. Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 429. Do notuse cleaning agents that are petroleum based,or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaningagents should be flushed promptly and not allowedto dry on the surface, or they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or anall-cotton towel to avoid surface scratchesand water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water toenter the vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth anda car washing soap to clean exterior lampsand lenses. Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 425.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicleby hand may be necessary to remove residuefrom the paint finish. Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 429.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish may damage it. Use only non-abrasivewaxes and polishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

425

The vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss tothe colored basecoat. Always use waxesand polishes that are non-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil andtar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’sfinish if they remain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, usenon-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreign matter.Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather, and chemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To help keep thepaint finish looking new, keep the vehicle in agarage or covered whenever possible.

Windshield and Wiper BladesIf the windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax, sap, or other material maybe on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a glasscleaning liquid or powder and water solution.

The windshield is clean if beads do not form whenit is rinsed with water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiperblades and affect their performance. Cleanthe blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soakedin full-strength windshield washer solvent. Thenrinse the blade with water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them asnecessary; replace blades that look worn.

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated WheelsYour vehicle may have either aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damage thesurface of the wheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Useonly GM-approved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

426

The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of your vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because you could damagethe surface. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels,but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, andbuff off immediately after application.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes, you could damagethe aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminumor chrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.

Do not take your vehicle through an automatic carwash that has silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. These brushes can also damage thesurface of these wheels.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tirecleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosion material to partsrepaired or replaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts willprovide the corrosion protection while maintainingthe warranty.

427

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches inthe finish should be repaired right away. Baremetal will corrode quickly and may develop intomajor repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up materials available from your dealer.Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected inyour dealer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal anddust control can collect on the underbody. If theseare not removed, corrosion and rust can developon the underbody parts such as fuel lines,frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materials fromthe underbody with plain water. Clean anyareas where mud and debris can collect. Dirtpacked in close areas of the frame shouldbe loosened before being flushed. Your dealer oran underbody car washing system can do thisfor you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaces on thevehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GMwill repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfacesof new vehicles damaged by this fallout conditionwithin 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) ofpurchase, whichever occurs first.

428

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

Description UsagePolishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and RoadOil Remover

Removes tar, road oil,and asphalt.

Chrome Cleanerand Polish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White SidewallTire Cleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and WireWheel Cleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onand wipe off.

Description Usage

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches, and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire ShineLow Gloss

Cleans, shines, andprotects in one step. Nowiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly removes spotsand stains from carpets,vinyl, and clothupholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.

429

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. Itappears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can seeit if you look through the windshield from outsideyour vehicle. The VIN also appears on the VehicleCertification and Service Parts labels and thecertificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the enginecode. This code will help you identify your vehicle’sengine, specifications, and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelYou will find this label on the inside of the glovebox. It is very helpful if you ever need to orderparts. On this label, you will find the following:

• VIN

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

430

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical Equipment

Notice: Do not add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damageyour vehicle and the damage would notbe covered by your warranty. Some add-onelectrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,even if your vehicle is not operating.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to yourvehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 88.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by acircuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheatsdue to heavy snow or ice, the wiper will stopuntil the motor cools. If the overload is caused bysome electrical problem, have it fixed.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protectedfrom short circuits by fuses and circuit breakers.This greatly reduces the chance of circuit overloadand fire caused by electrical problems.

Your vehicle has an underhood fuse block and aninstrument panel fuse block.

To identify and check fuses, circuit breakers, andrelays, refer to the Fuse Usage Chart on theinside surface of the fuse panel door.

431

Instrument Panel Fuse BlockThe instrument panel fuse block is located on thepassenger’s side of the center console, to theleft of the glove box near the floor.

Remove the console cover to access the fuseblock.

Fuses Usage

1 Sunroof

2 Rear Seat Entertainment

3 Rear Wiper

4 Liftgate

5 Airbags

6 Heated Seats

432

Fuses Usage

7 Driver’s Side Turn Signal

8 Door Locks

9 Automatic Occupant SensingModule

10 Power Mirrors

11 Passenger’s Side Turn Signal

12 Amplifier

13 Steering Wheel Illumination

SPARE Spare

SPARE Spare

SPARE Spare

SPARE Spare

SPARE Spare

14 Infotainment

15 Climate Control System, RemoteFunction Actuator

16 Canister Vent

17 Radio

18 Cluster

Fuses Usage

19 Ignition Switch

20 Body Control Module

21 OnStar®

22 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp,Dimmer

23 Interior Lights

Relays UsageRAP RLY Retained Accessory Power Relay

REAR DEFOGRLY Rear Defogger Relay

CircuitBreakers

Usage

PWR WNDW Power WindowsPWR SEATS Power Seats

EMPTY Empty

Misc. UsagePLR Fuse Puller

433

Engine Compartment Fuse Block

The engine compartment fuse block is located onthe driver’s side of the engine compartment.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 348for more information on location.

Fuses Usage1 Cooling Fan 22 Cooling Fan 1

Fuses Usage3 Auxiliary Power4 Not Used5 Spare6 Spare7 Anti-lock Brake System8 Air Conditioning Clutch9 Driver’s Side Low-Beam

10 Daytime Running Lamp 211 Passenger’s Side High-Beam12 Passenger’s Side Park Lamp13 Horn14 Driver’s Side Park Lamp15 Starter

16 Electronic Throttle Control, EngineControl Module

17 Emission Device 118 Even Coils, Injectors19 Odd Coils, Injectors20 Emission Device 221 Spare22 Powertrain Control Module, Ignition23 Transmission24 Mass Airflow Sensor25 Airbag Display

434

Fuses Usage26 Spare27 Stoplamp28 Passenger’s Side Low-Beam29 Driver’s Side High-Beam30 Battery Main 332 Spare33 Engine Control Module, Battery

34 Transmission Control Module,Battery

35 Trailer Park Lamp36 Front Wiper

37 Driver’s Side Trailer Stoplamp,Turn Signal

38 Spare39 Fuel Pump40 Not Used41 All-Wheel Drive42 Regulated Voltage Control

43 Passenger’s Side TrailerStoplamp, Turn Signal

44 Spare45 Front, Rear Washer48 Rear Defogger

Fuses Usage49 Anti-lock Brake System Motor50 Battery Main 252 Daytime Running Lamps53 Fog Lamps54 Climate Control System Blower57 Battery Main 163 Megafuse

Relays Usage31 Ignition Main46 Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch47 Powertrain51 Spare55 Crank56 Fan 1

58 Passenger’s Side TrailerStoplamp, Turn Signal

59 Driver’s Side Trailer Stoplamp,Turn Signal

60 Fan 361 Fan 262 Fuel Pump

435

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 449 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label located

under the hood. See your dealer for moreinformation.

Cooling System 10.5 qt 9.9 LEngine Oil with Filter 4.0 qt 3.8 LFuel Tank

Front-Wheel Drive 20.5 gal 77.6 LAll-Wheel Drive 16.6 gal 62.8 L

Transaxle Fluid 4.1 qt 3.9 LWheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 YAll capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transaxle Spark Plug Gap

3.4L V6 F Automatic 0.060 in (1.52 mm)

436

Maintenance Schedule ................................ 438Introduction ............................................... 438Maintenance Requirements ........................ 438Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 438Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 439Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 440Additional Required Services ..................... 443Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 444

Owner Checks and Services ..................... 445At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 446At Least Once a Month ............................. 446At Least Once a Year ............................... 447Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 449Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ... 450Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 451Maintenance Record .................................. 452

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

437

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? ThePlan supplements your new vehicle warranties.See your Warranty and Owner Assistance bookletor your dealer for details.

Maintenance Requirements

Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, replacement parts, andrecommended fluids and lubricants asprescribed in this manual are necessary tokeep your vehicle in good working condition.Any damage caused by failure to followscheduled maintenance may not be covered bywarranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keepyour vehicle in good working condition, but alsohelps the environment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of the airwe breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrongtire inflation can increase the level of emissionsfrom your vehicle. To help protect our environment,and to keep your vehicle in good condition, besure to maintain your vehicle properly.

438

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to help you keep yourvehicle in good working condition. But we donot know exactly how you will drive it. You maydrive very short distances only a few times a week.Or you may drive long distances all the time invery hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehiclein making deliveries. Or you may drive it towork, to do errands, or in many other ways.Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You mayneed more frequent checks and replacements. Soplease read the following and note how youdrive. If you have any questions on how to keepyour vehicle in good condition, see your GMGoodwrench® dealer.This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo withinrecommended limits. You will find these limitson the Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 321.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces withinlegal driving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 341.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance onpage 440 should be performed when indicated.See Additional Required Services on page 443 andMaintenance Footnotes on page 444 for furtherinformation.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on avehicle can be dangerous. In trying to dosome jobs, you can be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance work only ifyou have the required know-how and theproper tools and equipment for the job. Ifyou have any doubt, see your GMGoodwrench® dealer to have a qualifiedtechnician do the work.

Some maintenance services can be complex. So,unless you are technically qualified and havethe necessary equipment, you should have yourGM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.

439

When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer foryour service needs, you will know that GM-trainedand supported service technicians will performthe work using genuine GM parts.

If you want to purchase service information, seeService Publications Ordering Information onpage 474.

Owner Checks and Services on page 445 tells youwhat should be checked, when to check it, andwhat you can easily do to help keep your vehicle ingood condition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids, andlubricants to use are listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 449 and NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 450.When your vehicle is serviced, make sure theseare used. All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before you or anyone elsedrives the vehicle. We recommend the use ofgenuine GM parts.

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the change engine oil light and/or CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message comes on, itmeans that service is required for your vehicle.Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possiblewithin the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possiblethat, if you are driving under the best conditions,the engine oil life system may not indicatethat vehicle service is necessary for over a year.However, the engine oil and filter must be changedat least once a year and at this time the systemmust be reset. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer hasGM-trained service technicians who will performthis work using genuine GM parts and resetthe system.

If the engine oil life system is ever resetaccidentally, you must service your vehicle within3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System onpage 352 for information on the Engine Oil LifeSystem and resetting the system.

440

When the change engine oil light and/or CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message appears, certainservices, checks, and inspections are required.Required services are described in the followingfor “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”Generally, it is recommended that your first servicebe Maintenance I, your second service beMaintenance II, and that you alternateMaintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.However, in some cases, Maintenance II may berequired more often.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if thelight/message comes on within 10 months sincethe vehicle was purchased or Maintenance IIwas performed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if theprevious service performed was Maintenance I.Always use Maintenance II whenever thelight/message comes on 10 months or more sincethe last service or if the light/message has notcome on at all for one year.

441

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 349. Reset oil life system.See Engine Oil Life System on page 352. An Emission Control Service. • •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k). • •Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 354. See footnote (l). •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 399 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month onpage 446.

• •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid asneeded. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” inthis section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (g). •Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j). •

442

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicatedmiles (kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. • • • • • •Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 354. • • •

Change automatic transaxle fluid (severeservice). See footnote (h). • • •

Change automatic transaxle fluid (normalservice). •

Replace spark plugs and inspect sparkplug wires. An Emission Control Service. •

Engine cooling system service(or every five years, whichever occursfirst). An Emission Control Service. Seefootnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service. Seefootnote (m).

•

443

Maintenance Footnotes(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses forproper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors forsurface condition. Inspect other brake parts,including calipers, parking brake, etc. Checkparking brake adjustment.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose, or missingparts, signs of wear. Visually check constantvelocity joints, rubber boots, and axle seals forleaks.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replacedif they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace withgenuine GM parts as needed. To help ensureproper operation, a pressure test of the coolingsystem and pressure cap and cleaning the outsideof the radiator and air conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear orcracking. Replace wiper blades that appear wornor damaged or that streak or miss areas ofthe windshield.

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and allyour belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are working properly. Look forany other loose or damaged safety belt systemparts. If you see anything that might keep a safetybelt system from doing its job, have it repaired.Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Alsolook for any opened or broken airbag coverings,and have them repaired or replaced. Theairbag system does not need regular maintenance.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latchassemblies, secondary latches, pivots, springanchor and release pawl, hood and door hinges,rear folding seats, and liftgate hinges. Morefrequent lubrication may be required whenexposed to a corrosive environment. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean clothwill make them last longer, seal better, and notstick or squeak.

(g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,the filter may require replacement more often.

444

(h) Change automatic transaxle fluid if the vehicleis mainly driven under one or more of theseconditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) orhigher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery

service.

(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. Thisservice can be complex; you should haveyour dealer perform this service. See EngineCoolant on page 357 for what to use. Inspecthoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap,and filler neck. Pressure test the coolingsystem and pressure cap.

(j) Check system for interference or binding andfor damaged or missing parts. Replace partsas needed. Replace any components that havehigh effort or excessive wear.

(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system couldindicate a problem. Have the system inspectedand repaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluidif needed.

(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oil change.

(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt ifnecessary.

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should beperformed at the intervals specified to help ensurethe safety, dependability, and emission controlperformance of your vehicle. Your GMGoodwrench® dealer can assist you with thesechecks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed atonce. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are addedto your vehicle, make sure they are the properones, as shown in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 449.

445

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checksat each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oil ifnecessary. See Engine Oil on page 349 forfurther details.

Notice: It is important to check your oilregularly and keep it at the proper level. Failureto keep your engine oil at the proper levelcan cause damage to your engine not coveredby your warranty.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. SeeEngine Coolant on page 357 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level inthe windshield washer fluid reservoir and add theproper fluid if necessary.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckVisually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make surethey are inflated to the correct pressures. Do notforget to check the spare tire. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 393. Check to make sure thespare tire is stored securely. See Changing a FlatTire on page 408.

Tire Wear InspectionTire rotation may be required for high mileagehighway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life Systemservice notification. Check the tires for wearand, if necessary, rotate the tires. See TireInspection and Rotation on page 399.

446

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brake. See Parking Brake onpage 122.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and beready to turn off the engine immediately ifit starts.

3. Try to start the engine in each gear. Thevehicle should start only in PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in anyother position, contact your GM Goodwrench®

dealer for service.

Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock ControlSystem Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 122.Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN,but do not start the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If theshift lever moves out of PARK (P), contactyour GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.

447

Ignition Transaxle Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set, tryto turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift leverposition.

• The ignition should turn to LOCK only whenthe shift lever is in PARK (P).

• The ignition key should come out only in LOCK.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service isrequired.

Parking Brake and Automatic TransaxlePark (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, yourvehicle could begin to move. You orothers could be injured and propertycould be damaged. Make sure there isroom in front of your vehicle in case itbegins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regularbrake, set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and transaxle inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressurefrom the regular brake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release the parking brakefollowed by the regular brake.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service isrequired.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Takecare to clean thoroughly any areas where mud andother debris can collect.

448

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, partnumber, or specification may be obtained from yourdealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GMStandard GM6094M and displaysthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®

oil meets all the requirements foryour vehicle. To determine theproper viscosity for your vehicle’sengine, see Engine Oil on page 349.

Engine Coolant50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant onpage 357.

Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

AutomaticTransaxle

Use only T-IV AutomaticTransmission Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 88900925, inCanada 22689186). See AutomaticTransaxle Fluid on page 357.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

CarrierAssembly —Differential(Rear Drive

Module)

Axle Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677, inCanada 89021678).

Transfer Case(Power

Transfer Unit)

VERSATRAK® Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 12378514, inCanada 88901045).

Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch, Pivots,Spring Anchor,

andRelease Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, inCanada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and DoorHinges, RearFolding Seat

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, inCanada 992887).

449

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from yourdealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco® Part NumberEngine Air Cleaner/Filter 22676970 A1627CEngine Oil Filter 25010792 PF47Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 15781507 CF137Replacement Battery 15104967 75-6YRSpark Plugs 12568387 41-101Windshield Wiper Blades

Driver’s Side – 24 inches (60.0 cm) 22703508 —Passenger’s Side – 19 inches (47.5 cm) 22703507 —Rear – 15.2 inches (38.6 cm) 19120327 —

450

Engine Drive Belt Routing

3.4L V6 Engine

451

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed theservice, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements onpage 438. Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 445 can be added on thefollowing record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

452

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



453

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



454

Customer Assistance and Information ....... 456Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 456Online Owner Center ................................. 459Customer Assistance for Text Telephone

(TTY) Users ........................................... 460Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 460GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 461Roadside Assistance Program ................... 462Courtesy Transportation ............................. 465Vehicle Data Collection and

Event Data Recorders ............................ 468Collision Damage Repair ........................... 469

Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 473Reporting Safety Defects to the United

States Government ................................ 473Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian

Government ........................................... 473Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ...................................... 474Service Publications Ordering

Information ............................................. 474

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

455

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are importantto your dealer and to Pontiac. Normally, anyconcerns with the sales transaction or theoperation of your vehicle will be resolved by yourdealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentions of allconcerned, misunderstandings can occur. If yourconcern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a memberof dealership management. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level. If the matterhas already been reviewed with the sales,service, or parts manager, contact the owner ofthe dealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member ofdealership management, it appears your concerncannot be resolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., contact the PontiacCustomer Assistance Center by calling1-800-762-2737. In Canada, contact GeneralMotors of Canada Customer CommunicationCentre in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number inorder to give your inquiry prompt attention. Pleasehave the following information available to givethe Customer Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This isavailable from the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left of theinstrument panel and visible through thewindshield.

• Dealership name and location.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.

When contacting Pontiac, please remember thatyour concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’sfacility. That is why we suggest you followStep One first if you have a concern.

456

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both GeneralMotors and your dealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfied with yournew vehicle. However, if you continue to remainunsatisfied after following the procedure outlined inSteps One and Two, you should file with theBBB Auto Line Program to enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of courtprogram administered by the Council of BetterBusiness Bureaus to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informal disputeresolution program prior to filing a court action, useof the program is free of charge and your case willgenerally be heard within 40 days. If you do notagree with the decision given in your case, you mayreject it and proceed with any other venue for reliefavailable to you.

You can contact the BBB Auto Line Program usingthe toll-free telephone number or write them at thefollowing address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and theDistrict of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicleage, mileage and other factors. General Motorsreserves the right to change eligibility limitationsand/or discontinue its participation in this program.

457

STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the eventthat you do not feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following the procedure outlined inSteps One and Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of its participationin a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limited has committedto binding arbitration of owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle service claims. The programprovides for the review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, and may include aninformal hearing before the arbiter. The programis designed so that the entire dispute settlementprocess, from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should be completedin approximately 70 days. We believe our impartialprogram offers advantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and freeof charge.

For further information concerning eligibility in theCanadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively, you can call the General MotorsCustomer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompanied by yourVehicle Identification Number (VIN).

458

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center(United States only)The Owner Center is a resource for your GMownership needs. Specific vehicle information canbe found in one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specificvehicle, including tips and videos andan electronic version of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service historyand maintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privilegesonly available to members.

Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web forupdated information and to register your vehicle.

My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is a password-protected sectionof gmcanada.com where you can save informationon GM vehicles, get personalized offers, anduse handy tools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and servicesyou will have access to:

− My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such asaddress and phone number for each ofyour preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive service reminders andhelpful advice on owning and maintainingyour vehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage your profile,subscribe to E-News and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GMCanada section within www.gmcanada.com.

459

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard ofhearing, or speech-impaired and who use TextTelephones (TTYs), Pontiac has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer Assistance Center.Any TTY user in the U.S. can communicate withPontiac by dialing: 1-800-833-PONT (7668).(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesPontiac encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Pontiac, the letter shouldbe addressed to:

United States — Customer AssistancePontiac Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

www.Pontiac.com1-800-762-2737 or1-800-833-7668(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))

Roadside Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE(762-3743)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

460

Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General MotorsBusiness Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.Virgin Islands) — Customer Assistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma #2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants,can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the costof eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment requiredfor your vehicle, such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a very limited period oftime from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GMMobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also has a MobilityProgram. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

461

Roadside Assistance ProgramIn the U.S., call 1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743)

In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800

Service available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

As the owner of a new Pontiac vehicle, you areautomatically enrolled in the Pontiac RoadsideAssistance program. This value-added service isintended to provide you with peace of mind as youdrive in the city or travel the open road.

Who is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicleoperator, regardless of ownership. A person drivingthis vehicle without the consent of the owner isnot eligible for coverage.

The following services are provided in the U.S.during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and,in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverageperiod of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up toa maximum coverage of $100.

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for thecustomer to get to the nearest service station(approximately $5 in the U.S. and 10 litresin Canada). Service to provide diesel may berestricted. For safety reasons, propaneand other alternative fuels will not be providedthrough this service.

• Lock-out Service: To ensure security, thedriver must present the vehicle registration andpersonal ID before lock-out service is provided.Lock-out service is covered at no charge if youare unable to gain entry into your vehicle.If your vehicle does not start, RoadsideAssistance will arrange to have your vehicletowed to the nearest authorized dealership.In the U.S., replacement keys made at thecustomer’s expense will be covered within10 miles (16 km).

462

• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway orHighway: Tow to the nearest dealership forwarranty service or in the event of avehicle-disabling accident. Winch-outassistance when the vehicle is mired in sand,mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: Installation of your spare tirein good condition is covered at no charge. Thecustomer is responsible for the repair orreplacement of the tire if not covered by awarrantable failure.

• Jump Start: No-start occurrences whichrequire a battery jump start is covered at nocharge.

Additional Services for CanadianCustomers• Trip Routing Service: Upon Request,

Roadside Assistance can send you detailed,computer-personalized maps, highlighting yourchoice of either the most direct route or themost scenic route to your destination,anywhere in North America, along with anyhelpful travel information we may havepertaining to your trip. To request this service,please call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800.We will make every attempt to send yourpersonalized trip routing as quickly aspossible, but it’s best to allow three weeksbefore your planned departure date.Trip routing requests will be limited tosix per calendar year.

463

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:In the event of a warranty related vehicledisablement, while en route and over250 kilometres from original point of departure,you may qualify for trip interruption expenseassistance. This assistance covers reasonablereimbursement of up to a maximum of$500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night)and (C) alternate ground transportation(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assistyou with some of the unplanned expenseyou may incur while waiting for your vehicle tobe repaired.Pre-authorization, original detailed receiptsand a copy of the repair order are required.Once authorization has been given, youradvisor will help you make any necessaryarrangements and explain how to claim for tripinterruption expense assistance.

• Alternative Service: There may be times,when Roadside Assistance cannot providetimely assistance, your advisor may authorizeyou to secure local emergency road service,and you will be reimbursed up to $100upon submission of the original receipt toRoadside Assistance.

In many instances, mechanical failures arecovered under Pontiac’s Bumper-to-Bumperwarranty, and the duration of the Base WarrantyCoverage for Canadian customers of the newVehicle Limited Warranty. However, any cost forparts and labor for non-warranty repairs arethe responsibility of the driver.

464

For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,please provide the following to the RoadsideAssistance Representative:

• Your name, home address, and hometelephone number.

• Telephone number of your location.

• Location of the vehicle.

• Model, year, color, and license plate numberof the vehicle.

• Odometer reading, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle.

• Description of the problem.

While we hope you never have the occasion touse our service, it is added security while travelingfor you and your family. Remember, we areonly a phone call away. Pontiac RoadsideAssistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743), texttelephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438,Canadian customers call 1-800-268-6800.

Pontiac and General Motors of Canada Limitedreserve the right to limit services or reimbursementto an owner or driver when, in their solediscretion, the claims become excessive infrequency or type of occurrence.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or included inthe coverage provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Pontiac and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right to make anychanges or discontinue the Roadside Assistanceprogram at any time without notification.

Towing and Road Service ExclusionsSpecifically excluded from Roadside Assistancecoverage are towing or services for vehiclesoperated on a non-public roadway or highway,fines, impound towing caused by a violationof local, Municipal, State, Provincial, or Federallaw, and mounting, dismounting or changingof snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.

Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownership experience, we andour participating dealers are proud to offerCourtesy Transportation, a customer supportprogram for new vehicles.

For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper(U.S.) or Base Warranty Coverage period(Canada), provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, interim transportation may be availableunder the Courtesy Transportation program.

465

Several courtesy transportation options areavailable to assist in reducing your inconveniencewhen warranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty and is available onlyat participating dealers. A separate booklet entitled“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicle provides detailedwarranty coverage information.

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service,contact your dealer and request an appointment.By scheduling a service appointment andadvising your service consultant of yourtransportation needs, your dealer can helpminimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into theservice department immediately, keep driving ituntil it can be scheduled for service, unless,of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,please call your dealership, let them know this, andask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop thevehicle off for service, you are urged to do so asearly in the work day as possible to allow forthe same day repair.

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completedwhile you wait. However, if you are unable to wait,GM helps to minimize your inconvenience byproviding several transportation options.Depending on the circumstances, your dealer canoffer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceShuttle service is the preferred means of offeringCourtesy Transportation and participatingdealers can provide you with shuttle service to getyou to your destination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includes one-wayor round trip shuttle service within reasonable timeand distance parameters for the dealer’s area.

466

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,and public transportation is used as ‘shuttleservice,’ the reimbursement is limited to theassociated shuttle allowance and must besupported by original receipts. In addition, for U.S.customers, should you arrange transportationthrough a friend or relative, limited reimbursementfor reasonable fuel expenses may be available.Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and besupported by original receipts.

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with acourtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you fora rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle iskept for an overnight warranty repair. Rentalreimbursement will be limited and must besupported by original receipts. This requires thatyou sign and complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements. Requirements vary andmay include minimum age requirements, insurancecoverage, credit card, etc. You are responsiblefor fuel usage charges and may also be

responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond thecompletion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicleas a courtesy rental.

Additional Program InformationAll program options, such as shuttle service,may not be available at every dealer. Pleasecontact your dealer for specific information aboutavailability. All Courtesy Transportationarrangements will be administered by appropriatedealer personnel.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterallymodify, change or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and to resolve allquestions of claim eligibility pursuant to the termsand conditions described herein at its solediscretion.

467

Vehicle Data Collection andEvent Data RecordersYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles,has a number of sophisticated computer systemsthat monitor and control several aspects of thevehicle’s performance. Your vehicle uses on-boardvehicle computers to monitor emission controlcomponents to optimize fuel economy, to monitorconditions for airbag deployment and, if the vehiclehas the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS), to provideanti-lock braking and to help the driver control thevehicle in difficult driving situations. Someinformation may be stored during regular operationsto facilitate repair of detected malfunctions; otherinformation is stored only in a crash event bycomputer systems, such as those commonly calledEvent Data Recorders (EDR).

In a crash event, computer systems, such as theairbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) inyour vehicle may record information about thecondition of the vehicle and how it was operated,such as data related to engine speed, brake

application, throttle position, vehicle speed, safetybelt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,and the severity of a collision. This information hasbeen used to improve vehicle crash performanceand may be used to improve crash performance offuture vehicles and driving safety. Unlike the datarecorders on many airplanes, these on-boardsystems do not record sounds, such asconversation of vehicle occupants.

To read this information, special equipment isneeded and access to the vehicle or the devicethat stores the data is required. GM will not accessinformation about a crash event or share it withothers other than:

• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if thevehicle is leased, with the consent of thelessee,

• in response to an official request of police orsimilar government office,

• as part of GM’s defense of litigation throughthe discovery process, or

• as required by law.

468

In addition, once GM collects or receives data,GM may:

• use the data for GM research needs,

• make it available for research whereappropriate confidentiality is to be maintainedand need is shown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to aspecific vehicle with non-GM organizationsfor research purposes.

Others, such as law enforcement, may haveaccess to the special equipment that can read theinformation if they have access to the vehicleor the device that stores the data.

If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check theOnStar® subscription service agreement or manualfor information on its operations and data collection.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment andquality replacement parts. Poorly performedcollision repairs will diminish your vehicle’s resale

value, and safety performance can becompromised in subsequent collisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts madewith the same materials and construction methodsas the parts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GM Collision parts areyour best choice to assure that your vehicle’sdesigned appearance, durability, and safety arepreserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may also beused for repair. These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were total losses in prioraccidents. In most cases, the parts being recycledare from undamaged sections of the vehicle. Arecycled original equipment GM part, maybe an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’soriginally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these partsis not known. Such parts are not covered byyour GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered by that warranty.

469

Aftermarket collision parts are also available.These are made by companies other than GM andmay not have been tested for your vehicle. As aresult, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequent collisions.Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts are not covered by thatwarranty.

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collisionrepair facility that meets your needs before youever need collision repairs. Your GM dealermay have a collision repair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the art equipment, orbe able to recommend a collision repair center thathas GM-trained technicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the quality ofcoverage afforded by various insurance policyterms. Many insurance policies provide reducedprotection to your GM vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repaired withGM original equipment collision parts. If suchinsurance coverage is not available from yourcurrent insurance carrier, consider switching toanother insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company mayrequire you to have insurance that assuresrepairs with Genuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts or GenuineManufacturer replacement parts. Read your leasecarefully, as you may be charged at the end ofyour lease for poor quality repairs.

470

If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in anaccident.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure youare all right. If you are uninjured, make surethat no one else in your vehicle, or theother vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.Do not leave the scene of an accident untilall matters have been taken care of. Moveyour vehicle only if its position puts youin danger or you are instructed to move it by apolice officer.

• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This will help guardagainst post-accident legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, call GMRoadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 462 for moreinformation.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know wherethe towing service will be taking it. Get acard from the tow truck operator or write downthe driver’s name, the service’s name, andthe phone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehiclebefore it is towed away. Make sure thisincludes your insurance information andregistration if you keep these items in yourvehicle.

• Gather the important information you will needfrom the other driver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,model and model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurance company andpolicy number, and a general description ofthe damage to the other vehicle.

471

• If possible, call your insurance company fromthe scene of the accident. They will walk youthrough the information they will need. Ifthey ask for a police report, phone or go tothe police department headquarters thenext day and you can get a copy of the reportfor a nominal fee. In some states/provinceswith “no fault” insurance laws, a report may notbe necessary. This is especially true if thereare no injuries and both vehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility foryour vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealeror a private collision repair facility to fix thedamage, make sure you are comfortable withthem. Remember, you will have to feelcomfortable with their work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what work willbe performed on your vehicle. If you have aquestion, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.

Managing the Vehicle Damage RepairProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, GM recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take your vehicle there, orhave it towed there. Specify to the facility thatany required replacement collision parts be originalequipment parts, either new Genuine GM partsor recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycledparts will not be covered by your GM vehiclewarranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you mustlive with the repair. Depending on your policylimits, your insurance company may initially valuethe repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss thiswith your repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember if your vehicle isleased you may be obligated to have thevehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even ifyour insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.

472

If another party’s insurance company is paying forthe repairs, you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on that insurancecompany’s collision policy repair limits, as youhave no contractual limits with that company. Insuch cases, you can have control of the repair andparts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may openan investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order arecall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects tothe Canadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that yourvehicle has a safety defect, you shouldimmediately notify Transport Canada, in additionto notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

473

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, we certainly hopeyou’ll notify us. Please call us at 1-800-762-2737,or write:

Pontiac Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axlesuspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unitrepair service procedures, adjustments, andspecifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,and transfer cases.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service GeneralMotors cars and trucks. Each bulletin containsinstructions to assist in the diagnosis and serviceof your vehicle.

In Canada, the service bulletin reference numbercan be obtained by contacting your GeneralMotors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE(1-800-463-7483). This reference number isneeded to order the service bulletin from Helm,Inc.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $6.00 US + Processing Fee

474

Owner InformationOwner publications are written specifically forowners and intended to provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. The ownermanual will include the Maintenance Schedule forall models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,and Warranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 US +Processing Fee

Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 US +Processing Fee

Current and Past Model Order FormsTechnical Service Bulletins and Manuals areavailable for current and past model GM vehicles.To request an order form, please specify yearand model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. onthe World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice andwithout incurring obligation. Allow ample timefor delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents areto make checks payable in U.S. funds.

475

✍ NOTES

476

AAccessories and Modifications ..................... 339Accessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 164Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ....................................................... 89Additives, Fuel ............................................ 342Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 431Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 354Air Conditioning ........................................... 166Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 177Readiness Light ....................................... 176

Airbag Sensing and DiagnosticModule (SDM) .......................................... 468

Airbag System ............................................... 72Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 89How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 80Passenger Sensing System ....................... 82Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 88What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 80What Will You See After an Airbag

Inflates? ................................................. 81When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 78Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 75

All-Wheel Drive ........................................... 378

All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) System .................... 299All-Wheel-Drive Service Light ....................... 191Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 295Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 181Appearance Care

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 426Care of Safety Belts ................................ 424Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 428Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 425Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 420Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 422Finish Care .............................................. 425Finish Damage ......................................... 428Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 424Leather .................................................... 423Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 427Tires ........................................................ 427Underbody Maintenance ........................... 428Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 429Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 425Weatherstrips ........................................... 425Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 426

Ashtray(s) .................................................... 165Audio System(s) .......................................... 218

Audio Steering Wheel Controls ................. 285Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............ 288

477

Audio System(s) (cont.)Care of Your CDs and DVDs ................... 288Navigation/Radio System, see

Navigation Manual ................................ 274Radio with CD ................................ 222, 228Radio with CD and DVD .......................... 239Setting the Time ...................................... 220Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................ 285Understanding Radio Reception ............... 287

Automatic Headlamp System ....................... 160Automatic Transaxle

Fluid ........................................................ 357Operation ................................................. 119

BBattery ........................................................ 372

Electric Power Management ..................... 163Run-Down Protection ............................... 164

Battery Warning Light .................................. 179Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 313Brake

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................. 295Emergencies ............................................ 297Parking .................................................... 122System Warning Light .............................. 180

Brakes ........................................................ 369

Braking ....................................................... 294Braking in Emergencies ............................... 297Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 114Bulb Replacement ....................................... 380

Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 380Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,

Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps ........... 381License Plate Lamps ................................ 383Replacement Bulbs .................................. 384Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps

and Back-up Lamps .............................. 382Buying New Tires ........................................ 401

CCalibration .......................................... 129, 131California Fuel ............................................. 342California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 340Canadian Owners ........................................... 3Capacities and Specifications ...................... 436Carbon Monoxide .............. 107, 127, 316, 328Care of

Safety Belts ............................................. 424Your CD and DVD Player ........................ 288Your CDs and DVDs ................................ 288

Cargo Lamp ................................................ 162CD, MP3 ............................................ 257, 264

478

Center Console Storage Area ...................... 138Chains, Tire ................................................. 406Check

Engine Light ............................................ 184Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 346Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 428Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................. 49Infants and Young Children ........................ 46Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..... 57Older Children ........................................... 43Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear

Seat Position .......................................... 64Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ........................ 66Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 54

Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 165Cleaning

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 426Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 425Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 422Finish Care .............................................. 425Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 420Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 424Leather .................................................... 423Tires ........................................................ 427

Cleaning (cont.)Underbody Maintenance ........................... 428Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 425Weatherstrips ........................................... 425Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 426

Climate Control System ............................... 166Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ........... 170Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 170

Collision Damage Repair ............................. 469Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 39Compact Spare Tire .................................... 420Compass ............................................ 129, 131Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 111Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 294Convenience Net ......................................... 143Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 183Engine Temperature Warning Light ........... 182Heater, Engine ......................................... 118

Cooling System ........................................... 362Cruise Control ............................................. 155Cruise Control Light .................................... 189Cupholder(s) ................................................ 137Customer Assistance Information

Courtesy Transportation ........................... 465Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ......................... 460

479

Customer Assistance Information (cont.)Customer Assistance Offices .................... 460Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 456GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 461Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ..................................... 474Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .......................... 473Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government .................... 473Roadside Assistance Program .................. 462Service Publications Ordering

Information ........................................... 474

DDaytime Running Lamps ............................. 160Defensive Driving ........................................ 290Delayed Locking .......................................... 105Disc, MP3 .......................................... 257, 264Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 340Dome Lamp ................................................ 162Door

Ajar Light ................................................. 192Delayed Locking ...................................... 105

Door (cont.)Locks ....................................................... 104Power Door Locks ................................... 105Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 105Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 106

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 25Seat Height Adjuster .................................... 9

Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 194DIC Operation and Displays ..................... 195DIC Vehicle Personalization ..................... 210DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 200

DrivingAt Night ................................................... 306City .......................................................... 311Defensive ................................................. 290Drunken ................................................... 291Freeway ................................................... 312Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 314In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 308Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 321Winter ...................................................... 316

DVDRear Seat Entertainment System ............. 274

480

EElectric Power Management ........................ 163Electrical System

Add-On Equipment ................................... 431Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 434Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 431Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 432Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 431

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 354Battery ..................................................... 372Change Engine Oil Light .......................... 188Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 184Coolant .................................................... 357Coolant Heater ......................................... 118Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 183Coolant Temperature Warning Light .......... 182Drive Belt Routing .................................... 451Engine Compartment Overview ................ 348Exhaust ................................................... 127Oil ........................................................... 349Oil Life System ........................................ 352Overheated Protection Operating Mode .... 362Overheating ............................................. 360Reduced Power Light ............................... 190Starting .................................................... 116

Entry Lighting .............................................. 162Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 468Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 42

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 354Finish Damage ............................................ 428Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 150Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 153Flat Tire ...................................................... 407Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 408Flat Tire, Storing ......................................... 418Fluid

Automatic Transaxle ................................. 357Windshield Washer .................................. 368

Fog Lamp Light ........................................... 189Fog Lamps .................................................. 161Folding Rear Seat ......................................... 17Folding Seatback, Passenger ........................ 15Fuel ............................................................ 341

Additives .................................................. 342California Fuel .......................................... 342Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 345Filling Your Tank ...................................... 343Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 343

481

Fuel (cont.)Gage ....................................................... 192Gasoline Octane ...................................... 341Gasoline Specifications ............................ 341Low Warning Light ................................... 193

FusesEngine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 434Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 431Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 432Windshield Wiper ..................................... 431

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 183Fuel ......................................................... 192Speedometer ........................................... 174Tachometer .............................................. 174

GasolineOctane ..................................................... 341Specifications ........................................... 341

Gate Ajar Light ............................................ 192Glove Box ................................................... 137GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 461

HHazard Warning Flashers ............................ 150Head Restraints ............................................ 14Headlamps .................................................. 159

Automatic Headlamp System .................... 160Bulb Replacement .................................... 380Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 160Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 153Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 380Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,

Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps ........... 381High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 152On Reminder ........................................... 159

Heated Seats ................................................ 11Heater ......................................................... 166Height Adjuster, Driver Seat ............................ 9Highbeam On Light ..................................... 190Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 314Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 314Hood

Checking Things Under ............................ 346Release ................................................... 347

Horn ............................................................ 150How to Use This Manual ................................ 4How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 25

482

IIgnition Positions ......................................... 115Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 46Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 393Instrument Panel

Overview .................................................. 148Instrument Panel (I/P)

Brightness ................................................ 161Cluster ..................................................... 173

JJump Starting .............................................. 373

KKeyless Entry System ................................... 96Keys ............................................................. 95

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 387Lamps

Battery Run-Down Protection ................... 164Cargo ...................................................... 162Dome ....................................................... 162

Lamps (cont.)Electric Power Management ..................... 163Fog .......................................................... 161Map ......................................................... 162

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ......................................... 57

License Plate Lamps ................................... 383Liftgate ........................................................ 107Light

Airbag Readiness ..................................... 176Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 181Battery Warning ....................................... 179Brake System Warning ............................. 180Change Engine Oil ................................... 188Cruise Control .......................................... 189Door Ajar ................................................. 192Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ....... 182Fog Lamp ................................................ 189Gate Ajar ................................................. 192Highbeam On .......................................... 190Low Fuel Warning .................................... 193Malfunction Indicator ................................ 184Oil Pressure ............................................. 187Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 177Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .............. 175Reduced Engine Power ............................ 190Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 175

483

Light (cont.)Security ................................................... 189Service All-Wheel-Drive ............................ 191Service Vehicle Soon ............................... 192TCS Warning Light .................................. 182Tire Pressure ........................................... 183Traction Control System (TCS)

Warning ................................................ 182Lighting

Entry ........................................................ 162Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 321Lockout Protection ....................................... 106Locks

Delayed Locking ...................................... 105Door ........................................................ 104Lockout Protection ................................... 106Power Door ............................................. 105Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 105Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 106

Loss of Control ........................................... 305Low Fuel Warning Light ............................... 193Luggage Carrier .......................................... 138Lumbar

Manual Controls ......................................... 10

MMaintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services .................... 443At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 446At Least Once a Month ............................ 446At Least Once a Year .............................. 447Introduction .............................................. 438Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 444Maintenance Record ................................ 452Maintenance Requirements ...................... 438Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .... 450Owner Checks and Services .................... 445Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 449Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 440Using ....................................................... 439Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 438

Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 184Manual Lumbar Controls ............................... 10Manual Reclining Seatbacks .......................... 11Manual Seats .................................................. 8Map Lamps ................................................. 162Message

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 200Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview withCompass .............................................. 131

484

Mirrors (cont.)Automatic Dimming Rearview with

OnStar® and Compass ......................... 129Manual Rearview Mirror ........................... 129Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...... 129Outside Convex Mirrors ............................ 133Outside Power Mirrors ............................. 132

MP3 ................................................... 257, 264MyGMLink.com ............................................ 459

NNavigation/Radio System, see Navigation

Manual ..................................................... 274New Vehicle Break-In .................................. 114Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 450

OOdometer .................................................... 174Odometer, Trip ............................................ 174Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 303Oil

Change Engine Oil Light .......................... 188Engine ..................................................... 349Pressure Light .......................................... 187

Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 352

Older Children, Restraints ............................. 43Online Owner Center ................................... 459OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 133Other Warning Devices ................................ 150Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 170Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 164Outside

Convex Mirrors ........................................ 133Power Mirrors .......................................... 132

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode ....................................... 362

Owner Checks and Services ....................... 445Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3

PPaint, Damage ............................................ 428Park (P)

Shifting Into ............................................. 123Shifting Out of ......................................... 125

ParkingBrake ....................................................... 122Over Things That Burn ............................ 126

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 177Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............... 170Passenger Sensing System ........................... 82Passing ....................................................... 303

485

PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 112PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................... 113Power

Accessory Outlet(s) .................................. 164Door Locks .............................................. 105Reduced Engine Light .............................. 190Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 116Seat .......................................................... 10Windows .................................................. 110

Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 42Programmable Automatic Door Locks .......... 105

QQuestions and Answers About Safety Belts ...... 24

RRadios ........................................................ 218

Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............ 288Care of Your CDs and DVDs ................... 288Navigation/Radio System, see

Navigation Manual ................................ 274Radio with CD ................................ 222, 228Radio with CD and DVD .......................... 239Setting the Time ...................................... 220Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 285

Radios (cont.)Understanding Reception ......................... 287

Rear Compartment StoragePanel/Cover ............................................. 140

Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 106Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 39Rear Seat Armrest ...................................... 141Rear Seat Entertainment System ................. 274Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 36Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper .................... 155Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming

with Compass .......................................... 131Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming

with OnStar® and Compass ..................... 129Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...................... 129Rearview Mirrors ......................................... 129Reclining Seatbacks, Manual ......................... 11Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 449Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 326Reduced Engine Power Light ...................... 190Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ............ 96Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,

Operation ................................................... 97Removing the Flat Tire and Installing

the Spare Tire .......................................... 411Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 409Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 384

486

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government ............................. 473General Motors ........................................ 474United States Government ....................... 473

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ................. 90Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ......................................... 91Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 116Right Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ............................................... 35Roadside

Assistance Program ................................. 462Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 321Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 451Running the Engine While Parked ............... 128

SSafety Belt

Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 175Pretensioners ............................................. 42Reminder Light ........................................ 175

Safety BeltsCare of .................................................... 424Driver Position ........................................... 25How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 25

Safety Belts (cont.)Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................ 24Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 39Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 36Right Front Passenger Position .................. 35Safety Belt Extender .................................. 42Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 35Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 19Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 34

Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 440Seatback, Folding Passenger ........................ 15Seats

Driver Seat Height Adjuster .......................... 9Head Restraints ......................................... 14Heated Seats ............................................. 11Manual ........................................................ 8Manual Lumbar .......................................... 10Manual Reclining Seatbacks ...................... 11Passenger Folding Seatback ...................... 15Power Seat ................................................ 10Split Folding Rear Seat .............................. 17

Securing a Child RestraintRear Seat Position ..................................... 64Right Front Seat Position ........................... 66

Security Light .............................................. 189

487

Service ........................................................ 339Accessories and Modifications .................. 339Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle ......................................... 341All-Wheel-Drive Light ................................ 191California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 340Doing Your Own Work ............................. 340Engine Soon Light ................................... 184Publications Ordering Information ............. 474Vehicle Soon Light ................................... 192

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 88Setting the Time .......................................... 220Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 427Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 123Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 125Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 34Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 152Spare Tire

Compact .................................................. 420Installing .................................................. 411Removing ................................................ 409Storing ..................................................... 418

Specifications, Capacities ............................ 436Speedometer ............................................... 174Split Folding Rear Seat ................................. 17StabiliTrak® System ..................................... 298Starting Your Engine ................................... 116

Steering ...................................................... 300Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 285Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 151Storage Areas

Center Console Storage Area ................... 138Convenience Net ..................................... 143Cupholder(s) ............................................ 137Glove Box ................................................ 137Luggage Carrier ....................................... 138Rear Compartment Storage Panel/Cover .... 140Rear Seat Armrest ................................... 141Table ....................................................... 142

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 320Sun Visors .................................................. 110Sunroof ....................................................... 143

TTable ........................................................... 142Tachometer ................................................. 174Taillamps

Turn Signal, Stoplamps andBack-up Lamps ..................................... 382

TCS Warning Light ...................................... 182Theft-Deterrent, Radio ................................. 285Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 111

Content Theft-Deterrent ............................ 111

488

Theft-Deterrent Systems (cont.)PASS-Key® III+ ........................................ 112PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................ 113

Tilt Wheel .................................................... 151Tire

Pressure Light .......................................... 183Tires ........................................................... 386

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,Cleaning ............................................... 426

Buying New Tires ..................................... 401Chains ..................................................... 406Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 408Cleaning .................................................. 427Compact Spare Tire ................................. 420Different Size ........................................... 403If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 407Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 393Inspection and Rotation ............................ 399Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 411Pressure Monitor System ......................... 395Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 411Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ......... 409Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ..... 418Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 387Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 390

Tires (cont.)Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 403Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 405Wheel Replacement ................................. 405When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 401

TowingRecreational Vehicle ................................. 326Towing a Trailer ....................................... 328Your Vehicle ............................................. 326

TractionControl System (TCS) .............................. 297Control System Warning Light .................. 182StabiliTrak® System ................................. 298

TransaxleFluid, Automatic ....................................... 357

Transaxle Operation, Automatic ................... 119Trip Odometer ............................................. 174Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 152Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 151

UUnderstanding Radio Reception ................... 287Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 403

489

VVehicle

Control ..................................................... 294Damage Warnings ....................................... 5Loading .................................................... 321Service Soon Light ................................... 192Symbols ...................................................... 5

Vehicle Data Collection and EventData Recorders ........................................ 468

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) .......................................... 430Service Parts Identification Label .............. 430

Vehicle PersonalizationDIC .......................................................... 210

Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 170Visors .......................................................... 110

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 172Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 200Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 150Other Warning Devices ............................ 150Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance ..................... 405Different Size ........................................... 403Replacement ............................................ 405

Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 54Windows ..................................................... 109

Power ...................................................... 110Windshield

Washer .................................................... 154Washer Fluid ........................................... 368Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 384Wiper Blades, Cleaning ............................ 426Wiper Fuses ............................................ 431Wipers ..................................................... 153

Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ................... 155Winter Driving ............................................. 316

XXM Radio Messages ................................... 272

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ............... 438

490

2007 pontiac torrent owner manual m - general motors · 2007 pontiac torrent owner manual m 1. ......

Documents